WO2021017765A1 - Communication method and communication device - Google Patents

Communication method and communication device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021017765A1
WO2021017765A1 PCT/CN2020/100452 CN2020100452W WO2021017765A1 WO 2021017765 A1 WO2021017765 A1 WO 2021017765A1 CN 2020100452 W CN2020100452 W CN 2020100452W WO 2021017765 A1 WO2021017765 A1 WO 2021017765A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
time slot
offset value
configuration group
group identifier
downlink data
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/100452
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
杭海存
纪刘榴
施弘哲
毕晓艳
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2021017765A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021017765A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/1607Details of the supervisory signal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/18Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/18Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
    • H04L1/1812Hybrid protocols; Hybrid automatic repeat request [HARQ]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H04L5/0055Physical resource allocation for ACK/NACK
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to communication methods and communication devices.
  • multi-station coordinated transmission is a method to improve resource utilization and reduce the level of inter-cell interference.
  • base stations can interact through backhaul, air interface, etc., to coordinate the transmission of required information, so as to reduce interference to edge users and improve system performance.
  • Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) feedback resource conflicts resulting in a decrease in feedback performance.
  • the present application provides a communication method and communication device, which help to improve the transmission performance of HARQ feedback information, thereby improving the feedback performance of downlink data transmission.
  • the present application provides a communication method, the method includes: receiving a configuration group identifier; sending HARQ feedback information of downlink data transmission in a time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, and the downlink data transmission is related to the configuration The group identification corresponds.
  • the HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission is sent in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, the feedback can be distinguished according to different configuration group identifiers. Therefore, when different stations schedule downlink data transmission, different stations schedule The HARQ feedback information corresponding to the downlink data transmission can be respectively transmitted in different time slots, so that the conflict of the HARQ feedback resources can be avoided, and the feedback performance of the HARQ feedback information can be improved.
  • the configuration group identifier may be the high layer index of the control-resource set (CORESET), the downlink data channel configuration identifier, and the uplink Control channel resource indication information or slot offset value set index.
  • the CORESET high-level parameter index may be a CORESET group ID (CORESET group id);
  • the uplink control channel resource indication information may be physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) resource indication information (resource indicator).
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the method may further include: determining the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set.
  • sending HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier may include: determining the time slot to be fed back and the associated relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier The configuration group identifier is associated; the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is sent in the time slot to be feedback.
  • the HARQ feedback information is sent, and the HARQ feedback information carries the actual reception status of the downlink data transmission.
  • the HARQ feedback information is an unacknowledged NACK.
  • the HARQ feedback information with a value of NACK is sent.
  • the method before the determining the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set, the method further includes : Determine the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from multiple time slot offset value sets.
  • multiple time slot offset value sets are configured in the network, and different time slots to be fed back can be associated with different time slot offset value sets. That is, before determining the downlink data transmission and reception timings corresponding to different time slots to be fed back, the time slot offset value set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back can be determined from multiple time slot offset value sets, and then the time slot The slot offset value is determined in the offset value set.
  • the time slot offset value set mentioned here is different, which can mean that the length of the time slot offset value set is different; it can also mean that the time slot offset value in the time slot offset value set is different; or the length is different, the time slot The offset value is also different.
  • Different time slots to be fed back correspond to different time slot offset value sets, so that the feedback bits on different time slots to be fed back can be different, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from multiple time slot offset value sets may be It includes: according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier, and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set, from the multiple time slot offset value sets Determining the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back.
  • the configuration group identifier associated with the time slot to be fed back can be determined according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier, and then the time slot The offset value set is determined as the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back.
  • the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to the communication protocol Or pre-configured according to the signaling sent by the network side device.
  • the method may further include: receiving first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the downlink data transmission The index of the first slot offset value between the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the slot offset value set.
  • sending the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier includes: determining the first time slot offset from the time slot offset value set according to the first information Shift value; according to the first time slot offset value, determine the target feedback time slot used to send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission; according to the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier, The HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is sent in the target feedback time slot.
  • the target feedback slot after the target feedback slot for downlink data transmission is determined according to the first information, the target feedback slot can be first determined according to the association relationship between the target feedback slot and the configuration group identifier. For the time slot associated with the downlink data transmission, the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is sent in the target feedback time slot; otherwise, the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission may not be sent.
  • the method may further include: receiving first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the downlink data transmission
  • the index of the first slot offset value between the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the slot offset value set, and the target feedback slot determined according to the first slot offset value is the configuration group Identifies the associated time slot.
  • sending the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier includes: determining the first time slot offset from the time slot offset value set according to the first information Shift value; determine the target feedback slot according to the first slot offset value; send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback slot.
  • the target feedback time slot determined according to the first information sent by the network side is the time slot associated with the downlink data transmission. Therefore, after the target feedback time slot is determined according to the first information, it can be directly used in the target feedback time slot. Send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission.
  • determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information may further include: determining the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  • multiple time slot offset value sets are configured in the network, and different target feedback time slots can be associated with different time slot offset value sets. That is, before determining the downlink data transmission and reception timings corresponding to different target feedback time slots, the time slot offset value set corresponding to the target feedback time slot can be determined from multiple time slot offset value sets, and then the time slot offset value set corresponding to the target feedback time slot can be determined from the time slot offset value set. The slot offset value is determined in the offset value set.
  • the time slot offset value set mentioned here is different, which can mean that the length of the time slot offset value set is different; it can also mean that the time slot offset value in the time slot offset value set is different; or the length is different, the time slot The offset value is also different.
  • Different target feedback time slots correspond to different time slot offset value sets, so that the feedback bits on different target feedback time slots can be different, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from multiple time slot offset value sets may include : Determine the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from the multiple time slot offset value sets according to the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set.
  • the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier may be pre-configured according to the communication protocol , Or can be pre-configured according to the signaling sent by the network side device.
  • a communication method comprising: sending a configuration group identifier; receiving HARQ feedback information of a downlink data transmission in a time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, the downlink data transmission and the configuration group Logo correspondence.
  • the feedback can be differentiated according to different configuration group identifiers. Therefore, when different stations schedule downlink data transmission, different stations schedule The HARQ feedback information corresponding to the downlink data transmission can be transmitted in different time slots, so that the conflict of HARQ feedback resources can be avoided, and the feedback performance of HARQ feedback information can be improved.
  • the configuration group identifier may be a high-level parameter index of a control resource set, a downlink data channel configuration identifier, an uplink control channel resource indication information, or a time slot offset value set index .
  • the CORESET high-level parameter index may be CORESET group id; the uplink control channel resource indication information may be PUCCH resource indicator.
  • the method may further include: determining the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set.
  • receiving HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier may include: determining the time slot to be fed back and the associated relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier The configuration group identifier is associated; the HARQ feedback information is received in the time slot to be fed back.
  • the HARQ feedback information is an unacknowledged NACK.
  • the method may also The method includes: determining the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  • multiple time slot offset value sets are configured in the network, and different time slots to be fed back can be associated with different time slot offset value sets. That is, before determining the downlink data transmission and reception timings corresponding to different time slots to be fed back, the time slot offset value set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back can be determined from multiple time slot offset value sets, and then the time slot The slot offset value is determined in the offset value set.
  • the time slot offset value set mentioned here is different, which can mean that the length of the time slot offset value set is different; it can also mean that the time slot offset value in the time slot offset value set is different; or the length is different, the time slot The offset value is also different.
  • Different time slots to be fed back correspond to different time slot offset value sets, so that the feedback bits on different time slots to be fed back can be different, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from multiple time slot offset value sets may be It includes: determining from the plurality of time slot offset value sets according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set The set of time slot offset values associated with the time slot to be fed back.
  • the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to the communication protocol or Pre-configured according to the signaling sent by the network side device.
  • the method may further include: sending first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the downlink data transmission The index of the first time slot offset value between the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the time slot offset value set; wherein the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is received in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier , Including: determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information; and determining, according to the first time slot offset value, the information used to receive the downlink data transmission The target feedback slot of HARQ feedback information; according to the association relationship between the target feedback slot and the configuration group identifier, the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is received in the target feedback slot.
  • the method may further include: sending first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the downlink data transmission
  • the index of the first slot offset value between the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the slot offset value set, and the target feedback slot determined according to the first slot offset value is the configuration group Identifies the associated time slot.
  • receiving HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier may include: determining the first time slot offset from the time slot offset value set according to the first information Value; the target feedback slot is determined according to the first slot offset value; the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is received in the target feedback slot.
  • the target feedback time slot corresponding to the first information is the time slot associated with the downlink data transmission, therefore.
  • the receiving end determines the target feedback time slot according to the first information, it can directly send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot.
  • determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information may further include: determining the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  • multiple time slot offset value sets are configured in the network, and different target feedback time slots can be associated with different time slot offset value sets. That is, before determining the downlink data transmission and reception timings corresponding to different target feedback time slots, the time slot offset value set corresponding to the target feedback time slot can be determined from multiple time slot offset value sets, and then the time slot offset value set corresponding to the target feedback time slot can be determined from the time slot offset value set. The slot offset value is determined in the offset value set.
  • the time slot offset value set mentioned here is different, which can mean that the length of the time slot offset value set is different; it can also mean that the time slot offset value in the time slot offset value set is different; or the length is different, the time slot The offset value is also different.
  • Different target feedback time slots correspond to different time slot offset value sets, so that the feedback bits on different target feedback time slots can be different, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from multiple time slot offset value sets may include : Determine the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from the multiple time slot offset value sets according to the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set.
  • the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier may be pre-configured according to the communication protocol , Or can be pre-configured according to the signaling sent by the network side device.
  • the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set may be pre-configured according to a communication protocol, or may be based on signaling sent by a network side device Pre-configured.
  • the configuration group identifier may be one of a plurality of configuration group identifiers, and time slots with different parities of the index are associated with different configuration groups in the plurality of configuration group identifiers.
  • the configuration group identifier may be one of a plurality of configuration group identifiers, wherein the first time slot associated with any configuration group identifier in the plurality of configuration group identifiers Between the second time slots associated with the arbitrary configuration group identifier, there is one and only one time slot associated with other configuration group identifiers in the plurality of configuration group identifiers, where the first time slot is all For any time slot associated with the arbitrary configuration group identifier, the second time slot is the first time slot associated with the arbitrary configuration group identifier after the first time slot.
  • a communication device may be a terminal device or a chip that can be used in the terminal device.
  • the device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned first aspect and various possible implementation manners. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the device may include a communication unit and a processing unit.
  • the communication unit may be, for example, at least one of a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter, and the communication unit may include a radio frequency circuit or an antenna.
  • the processing unit may be a processor.
  • the device can be a terminal device.
  • the device may further include a storage unit, and the storage unit may be a memory, for example.
  • the storage unit is used to store instructions.
  • the processing unit is connected to the storage unit, and the processing unit can execute instructions stored in the storage unit or instructions derived from other sources, so that the device executes the foregoing first aspect and various possible implementation methods.
  • the storage unit may be ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
  • the device when the device is a chip or a chip system, the device may include: a communication unit and a processing unit.
  • the communication unit may be, for example, an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin, or a related circuit as a communication interface on the chip or chip system.
  • the processing unit may be, for example, a processor, a processing circuit, or a logic circuit. The processing unit can execute instructions so that the chip in the terminal device executes the above-mentioned first aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner.
  • the processing unit may execute instructions in a storage unit
  • the storage unit may be a storage unit in a chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like.
  • the storage unit may also be located in the roadside unit but outside the chip, such as ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
  • the processor mentioned in any of the foregoing may be a CPU, a microprocessor, an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits used to control the execution of the program of the method in the foregoing first aspect.
  • a communication device may be a network device or a chip that can be used in the network device.
  • the device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned second aspect and various possible implementation modes. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the device may include a communication unit and a processing unit.
  • the communication unit may be, for example, at least one of a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter, and the communication unit may include a radio frequency circuit or an antenna.
  • the processing unit may be a processor.
  • the device can be a network device.
  • the device may further include a storage unit, and the storage unit may be a memory, for example.
  • the storage unit is used to store instructions.
  • the processing unit is connected to the storage unit, and the processing unit can execute instructions stored in the storage unit or from other instructions, so that the device executes the above-mentioned second aspect and various possible implementation methods.
  • the storage unit may be ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
  • the device when the device is a chip or a chip system, the device includes a communication unit and a processing unit.
  • the communication unit may be, for example, an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin, or a related circuit as a communication interface on the chip or chip system.
  • the processing unit may be, for example, a processor, a processing circuit, or a logic circuit. The processing unit can execute instructions so that the chip in the network device executes the second aspect described above and the method in any possible implementation manner.
  • the processing unit may execute instructions in a storage unit
  • the storage unit may be a storage unit in a chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like.
  • the storage unit may also be located in the terminal device but outside the chip, such as ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
  • the processor mentioned in any of the foregoing may be a CPU, a microprocessor, an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits used to control the execution of the programs of the foregoing methods.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores a program.
  • the program is executed by the processor, the steps of the communication method described in any aspect of the foregoing are implemented.
  • the computer-readable medium may store a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the method in the first aspect.
  • the computer-readable medium may store a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the method in the second aspect.
  • this application provides a computer program product containing instructions.
  • the computer program product runs on the computer, the computer is caused to execute the methods in the above aspects.
  • the computer program product when executed on a computer, the computer executes the method in the first aspect.
  • the computer program product when executed on a computer, the computer executes the method in the second aspect.
  • a communication system including any one or more of the aforementioned devices.
  • Figure 1 is an example diagram of a scenario of multi-station cooperative transmission
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the feedback time slot and the receiving timing of an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a time domain resource allocation method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of receiving timing of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a sequence of receiving timings according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between HARQ feedback information and receiving timing according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between HARQ feedback information and receiving timing according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between stations and time slots according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between stations and time slots according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • Time Division Duplex Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • 5G 5th Generation
  • New Radio New Radio
  • NR New Radio
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may refer to user equipment, access terminals, user units, user stations, mobile stations, mobile stations, remote stations, remote terminals, mobile equipment, user terminals, terminals, wireless communication equipment, user agents, or User device.
  • the terminal device can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, a personal digital processing (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), with wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network, or future evolution of the public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) Terminal equipment, etc., this embodiment of the application does not limit this.
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • the network equipment in the embodiments of the present application may be equipment used to communicate with terminal equipment.
  • the network equipment may be an evolved base station (Evolutional NodeB, eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE system, or a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN) scenario wireless controller, or the network equipment can be relay station, access point, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment and network equipment in 5G network or network equipment in future evolution PLMN network, 5G
  • One or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the system or may also be a network node constituting a gNB or transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (distributed unit). unit, DU), etc., the embodiments of the present application are not limited.
  • the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU).
  • CU implements part of the functions of gNB
  • DU implements part of the functions of gNB.
  • the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC), packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and realizes the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer, and physical (PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical
  • the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), or the CU can be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal or network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also referred to as main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, for example, Linux operating system, Unix operating system, Android operating system, iOS operating system, or windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiments of the application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application can be provided according to the embodiments of the application.
  • the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal or network device that can call and execute the program.
  • various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices, or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture used in this application encompasses a computer program that can be accessed from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD)) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • Multi-station coordinated transmission can also be called multi-station coordinated transmission.
  • Multi-station coordinated transmission technologies include coordinated beamforming, coordinated scheduling, joint transmission, dynamic point selection, dynamic point blanking, and other technologies.
  • Figure 1 is an example diagram of a scenario of multi-station cooperative transmission. As shown in Fig. 1, multiple transmission points 101 separated geographically cooperate to transmit data for one terminal 102 or jointly receive data sent by one terminal. It should be understood that in the scenario shown in FIG. 1, more transmission points 101 may be included.
  • the following uses a terminal as an example to introduce the communication method of an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method of transmitting HARQ feedback information for other devices is similar.
  • FIG. 2 is an exemplary flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the application. It should be understood that FIG. 2 shows the steps or operations of the method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the technical solution proposed in this application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 2.
  • S210 The terminal receives the configuration group identifier.
  • configurations (configuration, config) are grouped, and different configuration groups are assigned different identities (IDs), and the identity of the configuration group is referred to as the configuration group identifier for short.
  • the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) configuration (config) group can be grouped, and different PDCCH configs are a group, and the PDCCH config ID is the configuration group identifier.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • CORESET can be grouped, and the CORESET high-level parameter index is the configuration group identifier.
  • CORESET high-level parameter index is CORESET group ID.
  • CORESET id can be considered as the configuration group identifier.
  • PUCCH resource indicator information (PUCCH resource indicator) can be grouped, and PUCCH resource indicators in different ranges belong to different configuration groups.
  • PDSCH config groups can be configured, and the PDSCH config ID is the configuration group identifier.
  • an identifier may be assigned to the slot offset value set, and the identifier of the slot offset value set may be used as the configuration group identifier.
  • An example of the identification of the slot offset value set is an index. For example, when two time slot offset value sets are configured on the terminal, the index of one time slot offset value set may be 0, and the index of the other time slot offset value set may be 1. In this case, the configuration group identifier can be 0 or 1.
  • an identifier may be assigned to the slot offset value set, and the identifier of the slot offset value set may be used as the configuration group identifier.
  • An example of the identification of the slot offset value set is the high-level parameter index configured in CORESET.
  • the identifier of one timeslot offset value set may be the high-level parameter index 0 in CORESET
  • the identifier of the other timeslot offset value set may be the identifier in CORESET High-level parameter index 1.
  • the configuration group identifier can be the high-level parameter index in CORESET or the identifier of the slot offset value set.
  • the slot offset value set may also be referred to as a slot timing set (K1 set).
  • the slot offset value set includes one or more elements (K1), and each element is a slot offset value.
  • the meaning of each element (K1) in the slot offset value set is: the slot offset value between the PDSCH and the PUCCH or PUSCH that feeds back its corresponding HARQ-ACK information.
  • different configuration group identifiers may correspond to different network devices.
  • the terminal can perform information transmission with different network devices according to configurations corresponding to different configuration group identifiers.
  • S220 The terminal sends HARQ feedback information of downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, where the downlink data transmission corresponds to the configuration group identifier.
  • the downlink data transmission corresponding to the configuration group identifier means that the downlink data transmission is the downlink data transmission scheduled by the downlink control information of the configuration transmission corresponding to the configuration group identifier, or refers to the downlink data transmission It is the downlink data transmission transmitted through the configuration group identifier corresponding to the configuration.
  • the configuration group ID corresponds to the downlink data transmission and may include the following meaning: the downlink control information for scheduling the downlink data transmission is the first downlink control information, and the first The CORESET group ID associated with the time-frequency resource of the downlink control information is the configuration group ID.
  • the configuration group identifier when the configuration group identifier is PUCCH resource indicator, the configuration group identifier corresponds to the downlink data transmission and may include the following meaning: the value in the PUCCH resource indicator field in the downlink control information for scheduling the downlink data transmission Identify the configuration group.
  • An example of downlink data transmission described here is PDSCH; an example of HARQ feedback information is hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement (HARQ-ACK) information.
  • HARQ-ACK hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement
  • the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier is an uplink time slot
  • the uplink time slot mentioned here may refer to a time slot containing uplink symbols.
  • An example of the uplink symbol is uplink orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM).
  • the feedback can be differentiated according to different configuration group identifiers. Therefore, when different network devices schedule downlink data transmission, different networks The HARQ feedback information corresponding to the downlink data transmission scheduled by the device can be respectively transmitted in different time slots, so that the conflict of the HARQ feedback resources can be avoided, and the feedback performance of the HARQ feedback information can be improved.
  • the terminal when the terminal sends the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, it can be implemented in various ways.
  • the following describes the implementation of HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission corresponding to the received configuration group identifier when the HARQ feedback codebook is a semi-static codebook and a dynamic codebook. the way.
  • the semi-static codebook means that the size of the HARQ-ACK codebook will not dynamically change with the actual data scheduling situation.
  • the size of the semi-static HARQ-ACK codebook is usually predefined according to the protocol or determined according to the parameters in the RRC configuration signaling.
  • the dynamic codebook means that the size of the HARQ-ACK codebook will dynamically change with the actual data scheduling situation.
  • the dynamic HARQ-ACK codebook size is usually generated based on the downlink assignment index (DAI) field in the DCI.
  • DCI downlink assignment index
  • the terminal sends the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission corresponding to the configuration group identifier in the time slot associated with the received configuration group identifier.
  • the terminal determines the downlink data reception timing corresponding to the uplink time slot according to the time slot offset value set, and according to the association relationship between the uplink time slot and the configuration group identifier, transmits the HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission.
  • the uplink time slot mentioned here is a time slot including uplink symbols.
  • the uplink time slot for which the downlink data reception timing is determined is referred to as the time slot to be feedback.
  • a semi-static codebook first determine the downlink data transmission and reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back, and then determine whether the downlink data corresponding to the configuration group identifier associated with the time slot to be fed back is received at the receiving timing. data transmission. If received, the HARQ feedback information is sent, and the HARQ feedback information carries the actual reception status of the downlink data transmission. If not received, then send NACK message.
  • the terminal sends HARQ feedback information in the following manner.
  • the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the K1 set.
  • the K1 set may be pre-configured by the terminal according to the communication protocol, or may be configured by the terminal according to parameters in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling sent by the network device.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • An implementation manner for the terminal to determine the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the K1 set is as follows.
  • the terminal performs all or part of the following three operations for each K1 in the K1 set according to the order of K1 in the K1 set from large to small.
  • the time slot number of the time slot to be fed back (denoted as slot NU)
  • K1 and uplink and downlink subcarrier spacing (subcarrier spacing, SCS)
  • calculate the time slot number of the downlink time slot corresponding to the time slot to be fed back (denoted as slot NU) Is slot ND).
  • the downlink time slot corresponding to the time slot to be fed back may be referred to as the HARQ-ACK window corresponding to the time slot to be fed back.
  • the time slot corresponding to the slot ND belongs to the HARQ-ACK window.
  • the corresponding HARQ-ACK window includes slot 2, slot 3, and slot 4.
  • K1 represents the time slot interval from the time slot occupied by the PDSCH to the HARQ-ACK reporting the PDSCH.
  • the time slot offset corresponding to the K1 parameter is based on the parameter corresponding to PUCCH or PUSCH (numerology) To be sure.
  • the slot ND of the time slot occupied by the PDSCH is a set of one or more downlink time slot slots ND corresponding to the slot NU-K1 calculated according to the uplink slots NU and K1.
  • the terminal judges that there can be at most M PDSCHs in total. There is no overlap in the time domain, and they are arranged in a certain order.
  • PDSCH-timeDomainResourceAllocationList is a list that contains multiple elements, and each element indicates the starting symbol and the symbol length of the PDSCH time domain allocation.
  • time domain resource allocation lists are R
  • any time domain resource allocation method in R if a symbol in the time domain resource allocation is configured as an uplink symbol, then the time domain In terms of resource allocation, PDSCH cannot be allocated, that is, the time domain resource allocation is removed from R, so as to ensure that the remaining time domain allocation in R can be used for downlink data transmission.
  • all time domain resource allocation methods in R are usually in the same time slot.
  • Time-domain resource allocation in R is shown in Figure 4.
  • the same type of grid with filled content represents a time domain resource allocation method
  • Figure 4 includes six time domain resource allocation methods.
  • the remaining time domain allocation in R can be denoted as R1.
  • R1 since the uplink symbol is included in the first time domain resource allocation method, it can be deleted from R, so that R1 includes the second to sixth time domain resource allocation methods.
  • the terminal After obtaining R1, the terminal has different operations according to whether it supports the transmission of multiple PDSCHs in one time slot according to its own capabilities.
  • time-domain resource allocation method A in R1 that meets the preset rules (for example, the earliest end of time-domain resource allocation) in R1, and mark it as a candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity j.
  • the time domain resource allocation method with overlapping domains is also to mark the PDSCH reception opportunity j, thereby obtaining a PDSCH reception opportunity, which corresponds to a set of time domain resources, and the marked time domain resource allocation is removed from R the way. Repeat this step for the time domain resource allocation list in R1 until R is empty.
  • the fifth time-domain resource allocation method ends earliest, so it is marked as the candidate PDSCH reception opportunity 1. Since the second and third time-domain resource allocation methods have overlapping time-domain resources with the fifth time-domain resource allocation method, the second time-domain resource allocation method is combined with the third time-domain resource allocation method. The domain resource allocation method is also marked as PDSHC receiving opportunity 1. Then delete these three time domain resource allocation methods from R1. At this time, R1 includes the fourth time domain resource allocation method and the sixth time domain resource allocation method.
  • the sixth time domain resource allocation method ends earliest, so the sixth time domain resource allocation method is recorded as PDSCH receiving opportunity 2. Since the fourth time-domain resource allocation method and the sixth time-domain resource allocation method have overlapping time-domain resources, the fourth time-domain resource allocation method is also recorded as PDSCH receiving opportunity 2.
  • the PDSCH reception timings obtained at this time are sorted according to the sequence of the PDSCH reception timings obtained by the foregoing calculation method.
  • the reason why the PDSCH time-domain allocation method with repeated time-domain resources is marked as the same PDSCH reception opportunity is mainly because the existing protocol restrictions do not allow multiple PDSCHs to overlap in the time domain.
  • All PDSCH reception opportunities obtained after performing the above 3 operations for each K1 in the K1 set constitute a PDSCH reception opportunity set.
  • the PDSCH receiving timing set is sorted according to the value of the corresponding K1 from large to small (that is, the downlink slot is from small to large).
  • the terminal can sequentially arrange the PDSCH reception opportunities in the PDSCH reception time set in the order of the cell identifiers from small to large, as shown in FIG. 6.
  • the terminal determines the PDSCH receiving timing 1 Whether there is downlink data transmission corresponding to the time slot to be fed back. If yes, send the actual HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in slot 4, for example, send HARQ-ACK; if not, send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in slot 4, and the HARQ feedback information is NACK.
  • the terminal After the terminal determines the PDSCH receiving time set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the K1 set, it can determine whether there is a time slot to be fed back at the PDSCH receiving time corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier Corresponding downlink data transmission.
  • the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group ID may be pre-configured by the terminal according to the communication protocol, or may be pre-configured by the terminal according to RRC signaling.
  • the time slot to be fed back corresponds to The PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back is available at the PDSCH receiving time, and the actual HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH can be sent in the time slot to be fed back; otherwise, it means that there is no time to be fed back at the PDSCH receiving time corresponding to the time slot to be fed back.
  • the PDSCH corresponding to the slot, and NACK is fed back in the time slot to be fed back.
  • the PDSCH corresponding to the configuration group identifier is received at the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back, it may be further determined whether the PDSCH receiving timing overlaps with the PDSCH receiving timings corresponding to other uplink time slots, where , The time slot to be fed back is associated with the same configuration group identifier with the other time slots. That is, it is determined whether the PDSCH receiving timings corresponding to different time slots to be fed back respectively overlap (for example, whether the PDSCH receiving timings corresponding to different PUCCHs overlap).
  • the actual HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH can be sent in the time slot to be fed back; if there is overlap, the following operations need to be performed to determine the feedback The last time slot of the actual HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH.
  • the terminal receives the first information sent by the network device, the first information is used to indicate the first time slot offset value (K1) between the PDSCH received at the PDSCH receiving time and the feedback time slot where the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH is located Index in the slot offset value set.
  • the terminal determines the target feedback time slot of the PDSCH according to the first information, and the target feedback time slot may be understood as the time slot indicated by the network device for sending the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH. For example, when the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are equal, the time slot number of the time slot where the PDSCH reception opportunity is located is added to the first time slot offset value indicated by the first information to obtain the time slot number of the target feedback time slot.
  • the time slot number of the time slot where the PDSCH receiving time is located is usually obtained by conversion based on uplink and downlink parameters.
  • the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH is sent in the time slot to be fed back; if the target feedback of the PDSCH is determined according to the first information
  • the slot and the above-mentioned time slot to be fed back are not the same time slot, and the target feedback time slot is associated with the configuration group identifier corresponding to the PDSCH, and the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH is sent on the target feedback time slot.
  • the HARQ-ACK window 1 corresponding to slot 4 includes slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2, and the HARQ-ACK window 2 corresponding to slot 6 includes slot 2. , Slot 3 and slot 4.
  • the slash-filled grid represents a PDSCH reception timing corresponding to slot 4.
  • this PDSCH reception timing is called PDSCH reception timing 1;
  • the vertical line-filled grid represents a PDSCH reception timing corresponding to slot 6.
  • this PDSCH reception timing is referred to as PDSCH reception timing 2.
  • the PDSCH receiving timing 1 corresponding to slot 4 and the PDSCH receiving timing 2 corresponding to slot 6 overlap in slot 2, or slot 2 is in the HARQ window of slot 4 and slot 6 at the same time.
  • the terminal When slot 4 and slot 6 are associated with the same configuration group identifier, the terminal first determines K1 from the K1 set according to the downlink control information (DCI) corresponding to the PDSCH received at PDSCH reception opportunity 1. For example, according to the DCI corresponding to the PDSCH received at PDSCH reception timing 1, it is determined that K1 is 4 from the K1 set. Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are equal, 2+4 is equal to 6 and slot 6 is associated with the configuration group identification corresponding to the PDSCH, and it can be known that the actual HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH received at PDSCH reception time 1 should be fed back in slot 6. Of course, the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH received at PDSCH reception opportunity 1 will also be fed back on slot 4, but the HARQ feedback information is NACK.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the terminal sends HARQ feedback information for the implementation mode, you can refer to the foregoing implementation mode for the terminal to send HARQ feedback information when one K1 set is configured on the terminal.
  • the terminal before determining the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back, the terminal should first determine the K1 set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back from among the multiple K1 sets, and determine the target feedback time slot according to the first information Before, the K1 set corresponding to the first information should be determined from the multiple K1 sets.
  • the multiple K1 sets may be configured by the terminal according to the communication protocol, or configured by the terminal RRC parameters.
  • the lengths of the multiple K1 sets may be different, or the K1 in the multiple K1 sets are different.
  • the K1s in the multiple K1 sets are different. All K1s may be different, or some K1s may be different.
  • the terminal determines the K1 set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back from the multiple K1 sets
  • the terminal can be configured with the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the K1 set according to the communication protocol or RRC parameters, and the terminal is configured according to the configuration The group identifier and the association relationship determine the K1 set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back.
  • each K1 set may be assigned an index, and the terminal is configured with an association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the K1 set index.
  • the terminal can determine the K1 set associated with the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration allocation identifier and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the K1 set index.
  • the terminal may also determine the K1 set associated with the time slot to be fed back from the multiple K1 sets according to other methods. For example, the terminal may configure the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the K1 set according to the communication protocol or RRC parameters. In this way, the terminal can directly learn the K1 set associated with the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship.
  • the terminal may first determine the configuration group ID corresponding to the first information, and determine according to the association relationship between the configuration group ID and the K1 set K1 set corresponding to the first information.
  • Different time slots to be fed back correspond to different time slot offset value sets, so that the feedback bits on different time slots to be fed back can be different, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the size of the K1 set affects the size of the HARQ-ACK codebook to a certain extent, so different network devices can configure an appropriate K1 set according to their own traffic to control the overhead of feedback signaling. For example, if the traffic volume of the network is very small and the network equipment can control certain downlink slots not to send service data, the K1 set may not include the downlink slot when it is set, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
  • the foregoing describes the implementation manner in which the terminal sends HARQ feedback information in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier when the HARQ feedback codebook is a semi-static codebook.
  • the following describes an implementation manner in which the terminal sends HARQ feedback information in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier when the HARQ feedback codebook is a dynamic codebook.
  • the terminal receives the first information (the meaning of the first information is as described above), and according to the first The information determines the target feedback time slot for downlink data transmission, and then, it can be first determined whether there is an association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier corresponding to the downlink data transmission. If so, the actual HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission, such as HARQ-ACK, is sent in the target feedback time slot; otherwise, the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is not sent in the target feedback time slot.
  • the first information the meaning of the first information is as described above
  • the terminal determines the K1 corresponding to the downlink data transmission according to the first information, the target determined according to the K1 There is an association relationship between the feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier corresponding to the downlink data transmission.
  • the terminal can directly send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot, without determining whether the target feedback time slot is the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier corresponding to the downlink data transmission.
  • the terminal needs to determine the target K1 set from the multiple K1 sets first, and then determine the required K1 set from the target K1 set according to the first information K1.
  • the method of determining the target K1 set from these multiple K1 sets can refer to the previous related content, which will not be repeated here.
  • the association relationship between the time slot (including the aforementioned time slot to be fed back and the target feedback time slot) and the configuration group identifier can be configured by the network device to the terminal through signaling .
  • the network device can add a parameter to the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration of the time slot.
  • the parameter is the configuration group identifier associated with the time slot, for example, CORESET group id, CORESET id, or PUCCH resource indicator.
  • the terminal can learn the configuration group identifier associated with the time slot from the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration. It should be understood that when the symbols in the time slot are all downlink symbols, the parameter can be regarded as invalid, or the parameter is not configured.
  • the association relationship between the time slot (including the aforementioned time slot to be fed back and the target feedback time slot) and the configuration group identifier can also be specified by the protocol, and the terminal configures the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier according to the protocol.
  • the terminal may be configured with the association relationship between the time slot number and the configuration group according to the protocol.
  • the terminal can determine the association between the time slot and the configuration group ID according to the protocol relationship.
  • a fixed even-numbered time slot is associated with an even-valued configuration group ID
  • an odd-numbered time slot is associated with an odd-valued configuration group ID.
  • the terminal can determine the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier according to the protocol.
  • the protocol stipulates that the time slots containing the uplink symbols in each frame are sorted according to the slot number from small to large, and the interval is associated with different configuration group identifiers.
  • the configuration group identifiers are also sorted according to the value of the identifier from small to large.
  • the time slots containing uplink symbols in each subframe are time slots 3, 5, 7, and 8, that is, the time slots that can be used to send HARQ feedback information in each frame are time slots 3, 5, and 5, respectively. 7 and 8.
  • time slots 3, 5, 7, and 8 can be configured for TRP 1 and TRP 2.
  • the network device can add the same configuration group identifier to the configuration or format configuration of the time slots with time slot numbers 3 and 7, for example, the configuration group identifier corresponding to TRP 1, when the time slot numbers are 5 and 8.
  • the configuration group identifier corresponding to TRP 1 may be the CORESET group id and CORESET id corresponding to the time-frequency resource used when TRP 1 sends DCI to the terminal, or may be the value indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI, or It can be the config of the PDSCH scheduled by the DCI, or it can be the PDCCH config corresponding to the DCI, etc.;
  • the configuration group identifier corresponding to TRP 2 can be the CORESET group id corresponding to the time-frequency resource used when TRP 2 sends DCI to the terminal , CORESET id, or may be the value indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI, or may be the config of the PDSCH scheduled by the DCI, or may be the PDCCH config corresponding to the DCI, etc.
  • the network device may configure the association relationship between the time slot (including the aforementioned time slot to be fed back and the target feedback time slot) and the K1 set for the terminal through signaling. For example, the network device may add a parameter to the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration of the time slot.
  • the parameter is the identifier of the K1 set associated with the time slot, for example, the index of the K1 set associated with the time slot.
  • the terminal can learn the K1 set associated with the time slot from the time slot configuration or the time slot format configuration. It should be understood that when the symbols in the time slot are all downlink symbols, the parameter can be regarded as invalid, or the parameter is not configured.
  • the network device configures the association between the time slot and the K1 set, so that when different TRPs correspond to different K1 sets, the network side device can adjust the resources used to feed back HARQ information to different network devices according to the network load.
  • association relationship between the time slot (including the aforementioned time slot to be fed back and the target feedback time slot) and the K1 set can also be specified by the agreement, and the terminal determines the association relationship between the time slot and the K1 set according to the protocol.
  • the protocol may specify that the even-numbered time slot associated index value is an even number K1 set, and the odd-numbered time slot associated index value is an odd value K1 set. Assuming that two K1 sets are configured on the terminal, one K1 set is K1 set-1, and the index of K1 set-1 is 0, and the other K1 set is K1 set-2, and the index of K1 set-2 is 1. Then the terminal can determine that the even-numbered time slot is associated with K1 set-1 and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with K1 set-2 according to the protocol.
  • the uplink time slots include 3, 5, 7, and 8. Assuming that two K1 sets are configured on the terminal, one K1 set is K1 set-1, and the index of K1 set-1 is 0, and the other K1 set is K1 set-2, and the index of K1 set-2 is 1. Then the terminal can determine that time slot 8 is associated with K1 set-1, and time slot 3, time slot 5, and time slot 7 are associated with K1 set-2 according to the foregoing protocol.
  • even-numbered time slots are always associated with the K1 set with a smaller index
  • odd-numbered time slots are always associated with the K1 set with a larger index.
  • the terminal can determine the association relationship between the time slot and the K1 set according to the protocol.
  • the network device can configure the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the K1 set through signaling. .
  • the terminal can determine the association relationship between the time slot and the K1 set according to the two association relationships.
  • the configuration method of the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier can refer to the foregoing content;
  • the configuration method of the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the K1 set can refer to the configuration method of the association relationship between the time slot and the K1 set.
  • the time slot in the configuration mode of the association relationship between the slot and the K1 set can be replaced with the configuration group identifier.
  • the configuration group identifier may be the PUCCH resource indicator identifier, the PDCCH-Config identifier, the CORESET identifier, the CORESET group identifier, or a higher layer index within the CORESET as referred to in the DCI. The situation is similar.
  • the CORESET group ID can be the CORESET group id; it can also be an index assigned to the CORESET group. For example, if there are two CORESET groups, the ID of one CORESET group can be 0, and the ID of the other CORESET group can be 1.
  • the PUCCH resource indicator can be the value of the PUCCH resource indicator; it can also be: all values of the PUCCH resource indicator are divided into different ranges, and different ranges are assigned different indexes, and the index of the range to which the value of the PUCCH resource indicator belongs It can be used as PUCCH resource indicator.
  • the PDCCH-Config identifier can be PDCCH-Config id; it can also be an index allocated to PDCCH-Config.
  • PDCCH-Config id there are two types of PDCCH-Config, and the identifier of one PDCCH-Config can be 0, and the other PDCCH-Config.
  • the identifier can be 1.
  • the CORESET identifier can be CORESET id; it can also be an index assigned to CORESET. For example, if there are two CORESETs, one of the CORESET identifiers can be 0, and the other CORESET identifier can be 1.
  • the first example is a first example:
  • the protocol pre-prescribes the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier, where the protocol specifies that the even-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group identifier 2.
  • the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered configuration group identifier
  • the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd-numbered configuration group identifier.
  • the even-numbered time slot is associated with a configuration group identifier with a smaller value
  • the odd-numbered time slot is associated with a configuration group identifier with a larger value.
  • the terminal According to the protocol, it can be known that the even-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group ID 1, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group ID 2.
  • the terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). It is assumed that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI is configuration group identifier 1.
  • HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
  • the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number of 4 according to the K1 set.
  • the receiving timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back is contained in two time slots, namely, time slot number 0 and time slot number 2.
  • the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH reception timings, one reception timing (i.e., reception timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with time slot number 0, and the other reception timing (i.e., reception timing) 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
  • the terminal receives PDSCH1 in a downlink time slot with a time slot number of 2, and determines that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI that schedules the PDSCH1 is configuration group identifier 1. Because the time slot to be fed back is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH1 can be sent in the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4).
  • the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 6 includes receiving timing 3 and receiving timing 2
  • the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes receiving timing 1 and receiving timing 2.
  • the time slot to be fed back includes receiving timing 1 and receiving timing 2.
  • the time slot to be fed back includes receiving timing 1 and receiving timing 2.
  • the time slot to be fed back includes receiving timing 1 and receiving timing 2.
  • the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) and the uplink time slot with time slot number 6 are associated with the same configuration group identifier.
  • receiving opportunity 2 is in the feedback time slot (time slot).
  • the terminal In the receiving opportunity set corresponding to the uplink time slot number 3) and the time slot number 6, the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to the first information in the DCI.
  • the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, it can be known that the K1 indicated by the first information is 2, and the time slot number of the time slot in which PDSCH1 is located is 2 (assuming the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are the same), so The number of the target feedback slot is 4. Since the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) and the target feedback time slot are the same time slot, the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK of PDSCH 1 on the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) Information, and NACK is fed back in the uplink slot with slot number 6 as the HARQ feedback information for PDSCH1.
  • the terminal determines according to the first information and K1 set that the target feedback slot number of the HARQ-ACK information of PDSCH1 is 4, that is, the uplink slot with slot number 4 is the HARQ-ACK of PDSCH1 Information target feedback slot.
  • the terminal sends the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH1 in the target feedback slot.
  • the protocol pre-prescribes the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group ID, where the protocol specifies the association between the even number time slot and the configuration group ID 1, and the odd number time slot and the configuration group ID 2 are associated.
  • the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered configuration group identifier
  • the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd-numbered configuration group identifier.
  • the even-numbered time slot is associated with a configuration group identifier with a smaller value
  • the odd-numbered time slot is associated with a configuration group identifier with a larger value.
  • the protocol also pre-prescribes the association relationship between even-numbered time slots and K1 set.
  • the protocol specifies that odd-numbered time slots are associated with K1 set index 1, and even-numbered time slots are associated with K1 set index 2.
  • the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered K1 set index
  • the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd-numbered K1 set index.
  • the even-numbered time slot is associated with a smaller K1 set index value
  • the odd-numbered time slot is associated with a larger K1 set index value.
  • the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered configuration group identifier
  • the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd-numbered configuration group identifier
  • the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered K1 set index
  • the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd value.
  • the configuration group ID 1 is 0,
  • the terminal knows that the even-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group ID 1
  • the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group ID 2.
  • Associated, even-numbered time slots are associated with K1 set-1, and odd-numbered time slots are associated with K1 set-2.
  • the terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). Assume that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI is configuration group identifier 1.
  • HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
  • the terminal determines the receiving timing of the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number of 4.
  • the reception timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH reception timings, one reception timing (i.e. reception timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with time slot number 0, and the other reception timing (i.e. reception timing 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
  • the terminal receives the PDSCH 1 in the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and determines that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI for scheduling the PDSCH 1 is the configuration group identifier 1. Because the time slot to be fed back is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 can be sent in the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4).
  • the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 6 includes receiving timing 3 and receiving timing 2
  • the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes receiving timing 1 and receiving timing 2.
  • the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) and the uplink time slot with time slot number 6 are associated with the same configuration group identifier.
  • the receiving time 2 is in the time slot to be fed back (time slot number). 4)
  • the terminal In the receiving opportunity set corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 6, the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to the first information in the DCI. It can be seen that the configuration group identifier 1 and K1 set-1 are associated with the uplink time slot with the time slot number of 4, and it can be seen that the index indicated by the first information in the DCI is K1 in K1 set-1.
  • the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, K1 with index 0 in K1set-1 is 2, and the time slot number of the time slot in which PDSCH1 is located is 2 It can be seen that the slot number of the target feedback slot is 4. Because the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) and the target feedback time slot are the same time slot, the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK of PDSCH 1 on the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) Information, and NACK is fed back in the uplink slot with slot number 6 as the HARQ feedback information for PDSCH1.
  • the terminal should determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to K1 set-1 and the first information.
  • the terminal should send the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 in the target feedback slot with the slot number of 4, that is, the slot number of the target feedback slot of the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 is 4.
  • the third example is a first example.
  • the protocol stipulates that the time slots containing uplink symbols in each frame are sorted in ascending order of time slot number, and the sorted time slots are alternately associated with different configuration group IDs, where the configuration group ID is also based on the value of the ID Sort from small to large, and configure the group ID with the smallest time slot associated value.
  • the terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). It is assumed that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI is configuration group identifier 1.
  • HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
  • the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number of 3 according to the K1 set. It is assumed that the receiving timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back is contained in two time slots. For example, if the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH reception timings, one reception timing (i.e., reception timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with time slot number 0, and the other reception timing (i.e., reception timing) 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
  • the terminal receives PDSCH1 in the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2. From the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI scheduling the PDSCH1 as the configuration group identifier 1, and the time slot to be fed back is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, it can be seen that the PDSCH1 can be sent in the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3) HARQ-ACK information.
  • the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to the first information in the DCI.
  • the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, it can be seen that K1 indicated by the first information is 1, and the time slot number of the time slot where PDSCH1 is located is 2, so the target The slot number of the feedback slot is 3. Since the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) and the target feedback time slot are the same time slot, the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK of PDSCH 1 on the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) Information, and NACK is fed back in the uplink slot with slot number 5 as the HARQ feedback information of PDSCH1.
  • the terminal determines according to the first information and K1 set that the target feedback slot number of the HARQ-ACK information of PDSCH1 is 3, that is, the uplink slot with slot number 3 is the HARQ-ACK of PDSCH1 Information target feedback slot.
  • the terminal sends the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH1 in the target feedback slot.
  • the protocol stipulates that the time slots containing the uplink symbols in each frame are sorted in ascending order of the slot number, the configuration group identifiers are sorted according to the value of the identifiers in ascending order, and the K1 set is sorted according to the K1 set index in ascending order
  • the sorted time slots are alternately associated with different configuration group IDs and different K1 sets.
  • the configuration group ID with the smallest slot associated value is the smallest slot number
  • the slot with the smallest slot number has the index Small K1 set association.
  • the uplink time slot includes time slots 3, 4, 5, and 7, and they are sorted from smallest to largest; the configuration group ID 1 is "0", the configuration group ID 2 is "1", K1 set includes K1 set-1 and K1 set -2, the index of K1 set-1 is 0, the index of K1 set-2 is 1, and the terminal knows according to the protocol that time slot 3 is associated with configuration group identification 1, time slot 4 is associated with configuration group identification 2, and time slot 5 Associated with configuration group ID 1, time slot 7 is associated with configuration group ID 2, time slot 3 is associated with K1 set-1, time slot 4 is associated with K1 set-2, time slot 5 is associated with K1 set-1, and time slot 7 is associated with K1 set -2.
  • K1 set-1 ⁇ 1, 3 ⁇ .
  • the terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). Assume that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI is configuration group identifier 1.
  • HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
  • the receiving timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH receiving timings, one receiving timing (i.e. receiving timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with slot number 0, and the other receiving timing (i.e. receiving timing) 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
  • the terminal receives PDSCH 1 in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2. From the configuration group ID corresponding to the DCI scheduling the PDSCH1 as configuration group ID 1, and the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number 3 is associated with the configuration group ID 1, it can be seen that the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3 ) Send the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1.
  • the terminal Assuming that the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 5 includes receiving timing 3, and receiving timing 3 overlaps with receiving timing 2, the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH 1 according to the first information in the DCI.
  • the index indicated by the first information in the DCI is K1 in K1 set-1.
  • the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, K1 with index 0 in K1 set-1 is 1, and the time slot number of the time slot where PDSCH 1 is located It is known that the time slot number of the target feedback time slot is 3.
  • the terminal Since the target feedback time slot and the time slot to be fed back are the same time slot (the time slot number is 3), the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK information of PDSCH 1 on the time slot with the time slot number 3, and The uplink time slot with the time slot number of 5 feeds back NACK as the HARQ feedback information of PDSCH 1.
  • the slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, K1 with index 0 in K1set-1 is 1, and the slot number of the time slot in which PDSCH1 is located is 2. It can be seen that the terminal should send the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 in the time slot with the time slot number 3, that is, the time slot number of the target feedback time slot of the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 is 3.
  • the network device configures the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier for the terminal through RRC signaling.
  • the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration of time slot 3 and time slot 5 can be added with the information of configuration group identifier 1
  • the time slot configuration of time slot 7 and time slot 8 or the time slot configuration of time slot 8 can be added with configuration The information of the group identifier 2, where time slot 3, time slot 5, time slot 7 and time slot 8 are all time slots containing uplink symbols.
  • the terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). It is assumed that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI is configuration group identifier 1.
  • HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
  • the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number of 3 according to the K1 set. It is assumed that the receiving timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back is contained in two time slots. For example, if the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH reception timings, one reception timing (i.e., reception timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with time slot number 0, and the other reception timing (i.e., reception timing) 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
  • the terminal receives PDSCH1 in the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2. From the configuration group ID corresponding to the DCI scheduling the PDSCH1 as configuration group ID 1, and the uplink time slot with slot number 3 is associated with configuration group ID 1, it can be seen that the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3) The HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 is sent.
  • the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to the first information in the DCI.
  • the slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, it can be seen that K1 indicated by the first information is 1, and the slot number of the time slot in which PDSCH 1 is located is 2, then The slot number of the target feedback slot is 3.
  • the target feedback time slot and the time slot to be fed back are the same time slot, so the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK information of PDSCH 1 in the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3) , And NACK is fed back in the uplink slot with slot number 5 as the HARQ feedback information of PDSCH 1.
  • the terminal determines according to the first information and K1 set that the target feedback slot number of the HARQ-ACK information of PDSCH 1 is 3, that is, the uplink slot with slot number 3 is the HARQ of PDSCH 1 -The target feedback slot for ACK information.
  • the terminal sends the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 in the target feedback time slot.
  • the network device configures the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier for the terminal through RRC signaling.
  • the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration of time slot 3 and time slot 5 can be added with the configuration group identifier 1 and K1 set-1 information
  • the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration of time slot 7 and time slot 8 Information for configuring group identification 2 and K1 set-2 can be added to it.
  • Time slot 3, time slot 5, time slot 7 and time slot 8 are time slots containing uplink symbols.
  • the terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). Assume that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group ID corresponding to the DCI is configuration group ID 1.
  • HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
  • the receiving timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH receiving timings, one receiving timing (i.e. receiving timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with slot number 0, and the other receiving timing (i.e. receiving timing) 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
  • the terminal receives PDSCH 1 in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2. From the configuration group ID corresponding to the DCI scheduling the PDSCH 1 as configuration group ID 1, and the uplink time slot with slot number 3 is associated with configuration group ID 1, it can be seen that the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3 ) Send the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH1.
  • the terminal Assuming that the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 5 includes receiving timing 3, and receiving timing 3 overlaps with receiving timing 2, the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH 1 according to the first information in the DCI.
  • the index indicated by the first information in the DCI is K1 in K1 set-1.
  • the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, K1 with index 0 in K1 set-1 is 1, and the time slot number of the time slot where PDSCH 1 is located It is known that the time slot number of the target feedback time slot is 3.
  • the terminal Since the target feedback time slot and the time slot to be fed back (slot number 3) are the same time slot, the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK of PDSCH 1 on the time slot to be fed back (slot number 3) Information, and NACK is fed back in the uplink slot with slot number 5 as the HARQ feedback information of PDSCH 1.
  • the terminal should send the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 in the time slot with the time slot number 3, that is, the time slot number of the target feedback time slot of the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 is 3.
  • time slots containing uplink symbols are allocated to different TRPs at sequential intervals, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. 10, different TRPs can obtain relatively balanced uplink resources.
  • the relationship between the time slot and K1 set is specified in the protocol, no additional signaling overhead will be added.
  • the time slot number of the time slot may also be referred to as the number of the time slot or the index of the time slot.
  • FIG. 11 is an exemplary flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the application. It should be understood that FIG. 11 shows the steps or operations of the method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the technical solution proposed in this application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 11.
  • S1110 The network device sends the configuration group identifier.
  • the implementation of this step corresponds to the configuration group identifier received by the terminal in S210.
  • S210 For the specific content, refer to S210, which will not be repeated here.
  • S1120 The network device receives HARQ feedback information of downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, where the downlink data transmission corresponds to the configuration group identifier.
  • the implementation of this step corresponds to the HARQ feedback information sent by the terminal in S220.
  • S220 For the specific content, refer to S220, which will not be repeated here.
  • pre-set and pre-defined can be achieved by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other information that can be used to indicate related information in the device (for example, including terminal devices and network devices).
  • This application does not limit the specific implementation method.
  • the method implemented by the terminal device may also be implemented by a component (such as a chip or circuit) configurable in the terminal, and the method implemented by the roadside unit may also be implemented by the method configurable in the terminal.
  • the components (such as chips or circuits) of the roadside unit are implemented.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1200 according to an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that the communication apparatus 1200 can implement any function of the terminal device in the embodiment of FIG. 2.
  • the communication device may be a terminal, or a component (for example, a chip or a circuit) configurable in the terminal.
  • the communication device 1200 includes a receiving unit 1210 and a sending unit 1220, where the receiving unit 1210 and the sending unit 1220 may be collectively referred to as a communication unit.
  • the receiving unit 1210 and the sending unit 1220 may be implemented by a transceiver unit.
  • the communication device 1200 may correspond to the terminal in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal, or a chip or chip system configured in the terminal.
  • the communication device 1200 may correspond to the terminal in the method shown in FIG. 2, and the communication device 1200 may include a unit for performing operations performed by the terminal in the method shown in FIG. 2.
  • the units in the communication device 1200 and the other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding procedures of the method in FIG. 2.
  • the receiving unit 1210 can be used to perform S210 and/or the steps involved in terminal-side receiving in the above embodiments
  • the sending unit 1220 can be used to perform S220 and/or the above implementations.
  • the example involves the steps sent on the terminal side.
  • the communication device 1200 may further include a processing unit 1230.
  • the processing unit 1230 may be used to schedule the receiving unit 1210 to perform S210 and the sending unit 1220 to perform S220, and/or the steps involved in terminal-side processing, control, or determination in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the receiving unit 1210 in the communication device 1200 may correspond to the transceiver 1320 in the terminal device 1300 shown in FIG. 13, and the processing unit 1230 in the communication device 1200 may correspond to The processor 1310 in the terminal device 1300 shown in FIG. 13.
  • the receiving unit 1210 in the communication device 1200 may be an input interface, an interface circuit, an input circuit or a pin, and the sending unit 1220 may be an output
  • the interface, interface circuit, output circuit or pin, the processing unit 1230 may be a processor, a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • the communication device 1200 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device or a chip configured in the network device.
  • the communication device 1200 may correspond to the network device in the method shown in FIG. 11.
  • the communication apparatus 1200 may include a unit for performing operations performed by the network device in the method shown in FIG. 11.
  • each unit in the communication device 1200 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding procedures in the method shown in FIG. 11.
  • the sending unit 1220 may be used to perform S1110 in the method shown in FIG. 11 and/or the steps involved in network-side sending in the foregoing embodiment
  • the receiving unit 1210 may be used to perform S1120 and/or the foregoing steps in the method shown in FIG. 11
  • the embodiment involves the steps of receiving on the network side.
  • the communication device 1200 may further include a processing unit 1230.
  • the processing unit 1230 may be used to schedule the receiving unit 1210 to perform S1120 and the sending unit 1220 to perform S1110, and/or the steps involved in network-side processing, control, or determination in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the receiving unit and the sending unit in the communication device 1200 may correspond to the transceiver unit 1410 shown in FIG. 14, and the processing unit 1230 in the communication device 1200 may correspond to FIG. The processor 1422 shown in 14.
  • the receiving unit 1210 in the communication device 1200 may be an input interface, an interface circuit, an input circuit or a pin, and the sending unit 1220 may be an output
  • the interface, interface circuit, output circuit or pin, the processing unit 1230 may be a processor, a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the terminal device includes a processor 1310 and a transceiver 1320.
  • the terminal device further includes a memory 1330.
  • the processor 1310, the transceiver 1320, and the memory 1330 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 1330 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 1310 is used to download from the memory 1330. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 1330 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device may further include an antenna 1340 for transmitting uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 1320 through a wireless signal.
  • the foregoing processor 1310 and the memory 1330 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 1310 is configured to execute program codes stored in the memory 1330 to implement the foregoing functions.
  • the memory 1330 may also be integrated in the processor 1310 or independent of the processor 1310.
  • the aforementioned transceiver 1320 may be referred to as a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver 1320 may include a receiver (or called a receiver, a receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or called a transmitter, a transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
  • the terminal device shown in FIG. 13 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2.
  • the operation and/or function of each module in the terminal device are respectively for implementing the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the above-mentioned processor 1310 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 1320 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send or receive from the network device action.
  • the transceiver 1320 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send or receive from the network device action.
  • the foregoing terminal device may further include a power supply 1350, which is used to provide power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • a power supply 1350 which is used to provide power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may also include one or more of the input unit 1360, the display unit 1370, the audio circuit 1380, the camera 1390, and the sensor 1301.
  • the audio circuit also It may include a speaker 1382, a microphone 1384, and so on.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, it may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station.
  • the base station can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the base station may include one or more transceiver units 1410.
  • the transceiver unit 1410 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, and so on.
  • Each transceiver unit 1410 may include at least one antenna 1411 and a radio frequency unit 1412.
  • the transceiver unit 1410 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit).
  • the transceiving unit 1410 is mainly used for the transceiving of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending information to and receiving information sent by terminal equipment.
  • the processing unit 1420 is the control center of the base station, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading.
  • the processing unit 1420 may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the transceiver unit 1410 and the processing unit 1420 may be physically arranged together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the processing unit 1420 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access mode, or may respectively support wireless access networks of different access modes.
  • a wireless access network such as an LTE network
  • Access network such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks.
  • the processing unit 1420 may include a memory 1421 and a processor 1422.
  • the memory 1421 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 1422 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 1421 and the processor 1422 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the base station shown in FIG. 14 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method shown in FIG. 11.
  • the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station are to implement the corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the processing unit 1420 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the transceiving unit 1410 can be used to perform the operations described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device .
  • the transceiving unit 1410 can be used to perform the operations described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device .
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the processing device may be a chip.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • microcontroller unit microcontroller unit
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the steps of the above method can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electronic Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • serial link DRAM SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 11 The method of any one of the embodiments is shown.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 11 The method of any one of the embodiments is shown.
  • the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (solid state disc, SSD)) etc.
  • the network equipment in the above-mentioned device embodiments completely corresponds to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
  • the communication unit transmits the receiving or In the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving can be executed by the processing unit (processor).
  • the processing unit processor
  • component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
  • the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers.
  • these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • the component may be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • a signal having one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs).
  • programs When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a communication method and a communication device applicable to a coordinated multiple point transmission scenario. In the method of the present application, a network apparatus sends an allocated group ID, and a terminal apparatus receives the allocated group ID correspondingly. The terminal apparatus sends HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in a time slot associated with the allocated group ID. The network apparatus receives the HARQ feedback information in the time slot associated with the allocated group ID. The downlink data transmission corresponds to the allocated group ID. The technical solution of the present invention facilitates improving the performance of transmitting HARQ feedback information, thereby enhancing feedback performance for downlink data transmission.

Description

通信方法和通信装置Communication method and communication device
本申请要求于2019年07月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910687912.3、申请名称为“通信方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office with the application number 201910687912.3 and the application name "Communication Method and Communication Device" on July 29, 2019, the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及通信方法和通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to communication methods and communication devices.
背景技术Background technique
在通信系统中,多站协同传输是一种提高资源利用率、降低小区间干扰水平的方法。例如,基站之间可以通过回程、空口等途径进行交互,协调传输所需要的信息,以降低对边缘用户的干扰,提高系统的性能。In the communication system, multi-station coordinated transmission is a method to improve resource utilization and reduce the level of inter-cell interference. For example, base stations can interact through backhaul, air interface, etc., to coordinate the transmission of required information, so as to reduce interference to edge users and improve system performance.
但是,在多站协同传输的场景下,因为非理想回传(non-ideal backhaul)的存在,不同的站点协作时,可能会不能进行实时交互,这可能会带来下行数据传输的混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request,HARQ)反馈资源之间的冲突,从而造成反馈性能的下降。However, in the scenario of multi-site coordinated transmission, due to the existence of non-ideal backhaul, different sites may not be able to interact in real time when cooperating, which may lead to hybrid automatic reconfiguration of downlink data transmission. Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) feedback resource conflicts, resulting in a decrease in feedback performance.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种通信方法和通信装置,有助于提高HARQ反馈信息的传输性能,从而提高下行数据传输的反馈性能。The present application provides a communication method and communication device, which help to improve the transmission performance of HARQ feedback information, thereby improving the feedback performance of downlink data transmission.
第一方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:接收配置分组标识;在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,所述下行数据传输与所述配置分组标识对应。In the first aspect, the present application provides a communication method, the method includes: receiving a configuration group identifier; sending HARQ feedback information of downlink data transmission in a time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, and the downlink data transmission is related to the configuration The group identification corresponds.
该方法中,由于在配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,能够根据不同的配置分组标识进行反馈的区分,因此,不同的站点调度下行数据传输时,不同的站点调度的下行数据传输所对应的HARQ反馈信息可以分别在不同的时隙上传输,从而可以避免HARQ反馈资源的冲突,进而可以提高HARQ反馈信息的反馈性能。In this method, because the HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission is sent in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, the feedback can be distinguished according to different configuration group identifiers. Therefore, when different stations schedule downlink data transmission, different stations schedule The HARQ feedback information corresponding to the downlink data transmission can be respectively transmitted in different time slots, so that the conflict of the HARQ feedback resources can be avoided, and the feedback performance of the HARQ feedback information can be improved.
结合第一方面,在第一种可能的实现方式中,所述配置分组标识可以是控制资源集(control-resource set,CORESET)的高层参数索引(high layer index)、下行数据信道配置标识、上行控制信道资源指示信息或时隙偏移值集合索引。With reference to the first aspect, in the first possible implementation manner, the configuration group identifier may be the high layer index of the control-resource set (CORESET), the downlink data channel configuration identifier, and the uplink Control channel resource indication information or slot offset value set index.
其中,CORESET高层参数索引可以是CORESET组标识(CORESET group id);上行控制信道资源指示信息可以是物理上行链路控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)资源指示信息(resource indicator)。Among them, the CORESET high-level parameter index may be a CORESET group ID (CORESET group id); the uplink control channel resource indication information may be physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) resource indication information (resource indicator).
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式,在第二种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还可以包括:根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机。其中,在所述配 置分组标识所关联的时隙发送下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,可以包括:根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,确定所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识关联;在所述待反馈时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。With reference to the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner, in the second possible implementation manner, the method may further include: determining the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set. Wherein, sending HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier may include: determining the time slot to be fed back and the associated relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier The configuration group identifier is associated; the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is sent in the time slot to be feedback.
也就是说,在半静态码本情况下,先确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据传输接收时机,再确定该接收时机上有没有接收到该待反馈时隙关联的配置分组标识所对应的下行数据传输。若接收到,则发送HARQ反馈信息,且该HARQ反馈信息携带该下行数据传输的实际接收状态。That is to say, in the case of a semi-static codebook, first determine the downlink data transmission and reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back, and then determine whether the downlink data corresponding to the configuration group identifier associated with the time slot to be fed back is received at the receiving timing. data transmission. If received, the HARQ feedback information is sent, and the HARQ feedback information carries the actual reception status of the downlink data transmission.
结合第二种可能的实现方式,在第三种可能的实现方式中,所述下行数据接收时机处没有接收到所述下行数据传输时,所述HARQ反馈信息为非确认NACK。In combination with the second possible implementation manner, in a third possible implementation manner, when the downlink data transmission is not received at the downlink data reception timing, the HARQ feedback information is an unacknowledged NACK.
也就是说,待反馈时隙的下行数据传输接收时机上有没有接收到该待反馈时隙关联的配置分组标识所对应的下行数据传输时,发送值为非确认(NACK)的HARQ反馈信息。That is to say, when the downlink data transmission reception timing of the time slot to be fed back has received the downlink data transmission corresponding to the configuration group identifier associated with the time slot to be fed back, the HARQ feedback information with a value of NACK is sent.
结合第二种或第三种可能的实现方式,在第四种可能的实现方式中,所述根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机之前,所述方法还包括:从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。With reference to the second or third possible implementation manner, in the fourth possible implementation manner, before the determining the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set, the method further includes : Determine the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from multiple time slot offset value sets.
也就是说,网络中配置有多个时隙偏移值集合,不同的待反馈时隙可以关联不同的时隙偏移值集合。即,确定不同待反馈时隙对应的下行数据传输接收时机之前,可以先从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定出该待反馈时隙对应的时隙偏移值集合,再从该时隙偏移值集合中确定时隙偏移值。That is to say, multiple time slot offset value sets are configured in the network, and different time slots to be fed back can be associated with different time slot offset value sets. That is, before determining the downlink data transmission and reception timings corresponding to different time slots to be fed back, the time slot offset value set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back can be determined from multiple time slot offset value sets, and then the time slot The slot offset value is determined in the offset value set.
此处所述的时隙偏移值集合不同,可以指时隙偏移值集合的长度不同;也可以指时隙偏移值集合中的时隙偏移值不同;或者长度既不同,时隙偏移值也不同。The time slot offset value set mentioned here is different, which can mean that the length of the time slot offset value set is different; it can also mean that the time slot offset value in the time slot offset value set is different; or the length is different, the time slot The offset value is also different.
不同的待反馈时隙对应不同的时隙偏移值集合,可以使得不同的待反馈时隙上的反馈比特可以不同,从而可以节省信令开销。Different time slots to be fed back correspond to different time slot offset value sets, so that the feedback bits on different time slots to be fed back can be different, thereby saving signaling overhead.
结合第四种可能的实现方式,在第五种可能的实现方式中,所述从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合,可以包括:根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,以及所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。With reference to the fourth possible implementation manner, in the fifth possible implementation manner, the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from multiple time slot offset value sets may be It includes: according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier, and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set, from the multiple time slot offset value sets Determining the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back.
也就是说,可以根据待反馈时隙与配置分组标识的关联关系确定待反馈时隙关联的配置分组标识,然后再根据该配置分组标识与时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,将该时隙偏移值集合确定为该待反馈时隙关联的时隙偏移值集合。In other words, the configuration group identifier associated with the time slot to be fed back can be determined according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier, and then the time slot The offset value set is determined as the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back.
结合第二种至第五种中任意一种可能的实现方式,在第六种可能的实现方式中,,所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。Combining any one of the second to fifth possible implementation manners, in the sixth possible implementation manner, the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to the communication protocol Or pre-configured according to the signaling sent by the network side device.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式,在第七种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还可以包括:接收第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引。其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,包括:根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定用于发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息的目标反馈时隙;根据所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述目标反馈时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈 信息。With reference to the first aspect or the first possible implementation, in a seventh possible implementation, the method may further include: receiving first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the downlink data transmission The index of the first slot offset value between the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the slot offset value set. Wherein, sending the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier includes: determining the first time slot offset from the time slot offset value set according to the first information Shift value; according to the first time slot offset value, determine the target feedback time slot used to send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission; according to the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier, The HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is sent in the target feedback time slot.
也就是说,在动态码本的情况下,根据第一信息确定出下行数据传输的目标反馈时隙后,可以先根据目标反馈时隙与配置分组标识的关联关系确定目标反馈时隙是否是该下行数据传输关联的时隙,是则在该目标反馈时隙发送该下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息;否则可以不发送该下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。That is to say, in the case of a dynamic codebook, after the target feedback slot for downlink data transmission is determined according to the first information, the target feedback slot can be first determined according to the association relationship between the target feedback slot and the configuration group identifier. For the time slot associated with the downlink data transmission, the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is sent in the target feedback time slot; otherwise, the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission may not be sent.
结合第一方面或第一种可能的实现方式,在第八种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还可以包括:接收第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引,根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定的目标反馈时隙为所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙。其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,包括:根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定所述目标反馈时隙;在所述目标反馈时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。With reference to the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner, in an eighth possible implementation manner, the method may further include: receiving first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the downlink data transmission The index of the first slot offset value between the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the slot offset value set, and the target feedback slot determined according to the first slot offset value is the configuration group Identifies the associated time slot. Wherein, sending the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier includes: determining the first time slot offset from the time slot offset value set according to the first information Shift value; determine the target feedback slot according to the first slot offset value; send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback slot.
也就是说,根据网络侧发送的第一信息所确定的目标反馈时隙就是与该下行数据传输关联的时隙,因此,根据第一信息确定目标反馈时隙后,可以直接在目标反馈时隙发送该下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。That is, the target feedback time slot determined according to the first information sent by the network side is the time slot associated with the downlink data transmission. Therefore, after the target feedback time slot is determined according to the first information, it can be directly used in the target feedback time slot. Send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission.
结合第七种或第八种可能的实现方式,在第九种可能的实现方式中,根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值之前,所述方法还可以包括:从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。With reference to the seventh or eighth possible implementation manner, in a ninth possible implementation manner, determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information The method may further include: determining the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
也就是说,网络中配置有多个时隙偏移值集合,不同的目标反馈时隙可以关联不同的时隙偏移值集合。即,确定不同目标反馈时隙对应的下行数据传输接收时机之前,可以先从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定出该目标反馈时隙对应的时隙偏移值集合,再从该时隙偏移值集合中确定时隙偏移值。In other words, multiple time slot offset value sets are configured in the network, and different target feedback time slots can be associated with different time slot offset value sets. That is, before determining the downlink data transmission and reception timings corresponding to different target feedback time slots, the time slot offset value set corresponding to the target feedback time slot can be determined from multiple time slot offset value sets, and then the time slot offset value set corresponding to the target feedback time slot can be determined from the time slot offset value set. The slot offset value is determined in the offset value set.
此处所述的时隙偏移值集合不同,可以指时隙偏移值集合的长度不同;也可以指时隙偏移值集合中的时隙偏移值不同;或者长度既不同,时隙偏移值也不同。The time slot offset value set mentioned here is different, which can mean that the length of the time slot offset value set is different; it can also mean that the time slot offset value in the time slot offset value set is different; or the length is different, the time slot The offset value is also different.
不同的目标反馈时隙对应不同的时隙偏移值集合,可以使得不同的目标反馈时隙上的反馈比特可以不同,从而可以节省信令开销。Different target feedback time slots correspond to different time slot offset value sets, so that the feedback bits on different target feedback time slots can be different, thereby saving signaling overhead.
结合第九种可能的实现方式,在第十种可能的实现方式中,所述从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合,可以包括:根据所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。With reference to the ninth possible implementation manner, in a tenth possible implementation manner, the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from multiple time slot offset value sets may include : Determine the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from the multiple time slot offset value sets according to the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set.
结合第七种至第十种中任意一种可能的实现方式,在第十一种可能的实现方式中,所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系可以是根据通信协议预先配置的,或可以是根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。In combination with any one of the seventh to tenth possible implementation manners, in the eleventh possible implementation manner, the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier may be pre-configured according to the communication protocol , Or can be pre-configured according to the signaling sent by the network side device.
第二方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法包括:发送配置分组标识;在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,所述下行数据传输与所述配置分组标识对应。In a second aspect, a communication method is provided, the method comprising: sending a configuration group identifier; receiving HARQ feedback information of a downlink data transmission in a time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, the downlink data transmission and the configuration group Logo correspondence.
该方法中,由于在配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,能够根据不同的配置分组标识进行反馈的区分,因此,不同的站点调度下行数据传输时,不同的站点调度的下行数据传输所对应的HARQ反馈信息可以在分别不同的时隙上传输, 从而可以避免HARQ反馈资源的冲突,进而可以提高HARQ反馈信息的反馈性能。In this method, because the HARQ feedback information of downlink data transmission is received in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, the feedback can be differentiated according to different configuration group identifiers. Therefore, when different stations schedule downlink data transmission, different stations schedule The HARQ feedback information corresponding to the downlink data transmission can be transmitted in different time slots, so that the conflict of HARQ feedback resources can be avoided, and the feedback performance of HARQ feedback information can be improved.
结合第二方面,在第一种可能的实现方式中,所述配置分组标识可以为控制资源集的高层参数索引、下行数据信道配置标识、上行控制信道资源指示信息或时隙偏移值集合索引。With reference to the second aspect, in the first possible implementation manner, the configuration group identifier may be a high-level parameter index of a control resource set, a downlink data channel configuration identifier, an uplink control channel resource indication information, or a time slot offset value set index .
其中,CORESET高层参数索引可以是CORESET group id;上行控制信道资源指示信息可以是PUCCH resource indicator。Among them, the CORESET high-level parameter index may be CORESET group id; the uplink control channel resource indication information may be PUCCH resource indicator.
结合第二方面或第一种可能的实现方式,在第二种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还可以包括:根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机。其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,可以包括:根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,确定所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识关联;在所述待反馈时隙接收所述HARQ反馈信息。With reference to the second aspect or the first possible implementation manner, in the second possible implementation manner, the method may further include: determining the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set. Wherein, receiving HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier may include: determining the time slot to be fed back and the associated relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier The configuration group identifier is associated; the HARQ feedback information is received in the time slot to be fed back.
结合第二种可能的实现方式,在第三种可能的实现方式中,所述下行数据接收时机处没有发送所述下行数据传输时,所述HARQ反馈信息为非确认NACK。In combination with the second possible implementation manner, in a third possible implementation manner, when the downlink data transmission is not sent at the downlink data receiving timing, the HARQ feedback information is an unacknowledged NACK.
结合第二种或第三种可能的实现方式,在第四种可能的实现方式中,所述根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机之前,所述方法还可以包括:从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。In combination with the second or third possible implementation manner, in the fourth possible implementation manner, before the time slot offset value set is used to determine the downlink data reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back, the method may also The method includes: determining the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
也就是说,网络中配置有多个时隙偏移值集合,不同的待反馈时隙可以关联不同的时隙偏移值集合。即,确定不同待反馈时隙对应的下行数据传输接收时机之前,可以先从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定出该待反馈时隙对应的时隙偏移值集合,再从该时隙偏移值集合中确定时隙偏移值。That is to say, multiple time slot offset value sets are configured in the network, and different time slots to be fed back can be associated with different time slot offset value sets. That is, before determining the downlink data transmission and reception timings corresponding to different time slots to be fed back, the time slot offset value set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back can be determined from multiple time slot offset value sets, and then the time slot The slot offset value is determined in the offset value set.
此处所述的时隙偏移值集合不同,可以指时隙偏移值集合的长度不同;也可以指时隙偏移值集合中的时隙偏移值不同;或者长度既不同,时隙偏移值也不同。The time slot offset value set mentioned here is different, which can mean that the length of the time slot offset value set is different; it can also mean that the time slot offset value in the time slot offset value set is different; or the length is different, the time slot The offset value is also different.
不同的待反馈时隙对应不同的时隙偏移值集合,可以使得不同的待反馈时隙上的反馈比特可以不同,从而可以节省信令开销。Different time slots to be fed back correspond to different time slot offset value sets, so that the feedback bits on different time slots to be fed back can be different, thereby saving signaling overhead.
结合第四种可能的实现方式,在第五种可能的实现方式中,所述从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合,可以包括:根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系以及所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。With reference to the fourth possible implementation manner, in the fifth possible implementation manner, the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from multiple time slot offset value sets may be It includes: determining from the plurality of time slot offset value sets according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set The set of time slot offset values associated with the time slot to be fed back.
结合第二种至第五种中任意一种可能的实现方式,在第六种可能的实现方式中,所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。In combination with any one of the second to fifth possible implementation manners, in the sixth possible implementation manner, the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to the communication protocol or Pre-configured according to the signaling sent by the network side device.
结合第二方面或第一种可能的实现方式,在第七种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还可以包括:发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引;其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,包括:根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定用于接收所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息的目标反馈时隙;根据所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述目标反馈时隙接收所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。With reference to the second aspect or the first possible implementation, in a seventh possible implementation, the method may further include: sending first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the downlink data transmission The index of the first time slot offset value between the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the time slot offset value set; wherein the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is received in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier , Including: determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information; and determining, according to the first time slot offset value, the information used to receive the downlink data transmission The target feedback slot of HARQ feedback information; according to the association relationship between the target feedback slot and the configuration group identifier, the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is received in the target feedback slot.
结合第二方面或第一种可能的实现方式,在第八种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还可 以包括:发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引,根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定的目标反馈时隙为所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙。其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,可以包括:根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定所述目标反馈时隙;在所述目标反馈时隙接收所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。With reference to the second aspect or the first possible implementation, in an eighth possible implementation, the method may further include: sending first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the downlink data transmission The index of the first slot offset value between the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the slot offset value set, and the target feedback slot determined according to the first slot offset value is the configuration group Identifies the associated time slot. Wherein, receiving HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier may include: determining the first time slot offset from the time slot offset value set according to the first information Value; the target feedback slot is determined according to the first slot offset value; the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is received in the target feedback slot.
也就是说,第一信息所对应的目标反馈时隙就是与该下行数据传输关联的时隙,因此。接收端根据第一信息确定目标反馈时隙后,可以直接在目标反馈时隙发送该下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。In other words, the target feedback time slot corresponding to the first information is the time slot associated with the downlink data transmission, therefore. After the receiving end determines the target feedback time slot according to the first information, it can directly send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot.
结合第七种或第八种可能的实现方式,在第九种可能的实现方式中,根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值之前,所述方法还可以包括:从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。With reference to the seventh or eighth possible implementation manner, in a ninth possible implementation manner, determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information The method may further include: determining the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
也就是说,网络中配置有多个时隙偏移值集合,不同的目标反馈时隙可以关联不同的时隙偏移值集合。即,确定不同目标反馈时隙对应的下行数据传输接收时机之前,可以先从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定出该目标反馈时隙对应的时隙偏移值集合,再从该时隙偏移值集合中确定时隙偏移值。In other words, multiple time slot offset value sets are configured in the network, and different target feedback time slots can be associated with different time slot offset value sets. That is, before determining the downlink data transmission and reception timings corresponding to different target feedback time slots, the time slot offset value set corresponding to the target feedback time slot can be determined from multiple time slot offset value sets, and then the time slot offset value set corresponding to the target feedback time slot can be determined from the time slot offset value set. The slot offset value is determined in the offset value set.
此处所述的时隙偏移值集合不同,可以指时隙偏移值集合的长度不同;也可以指时隙偏移值集合中的时隙偏移值不同;或者长度既不同,时隙偏移值也不同。The time slot offset value set mentioned here is different, which can mean that the length of the time slot offset value set is different; it can also mean that the time slot offset value in the time slot offset value set is different; or the length is different, the time slot The offset value is also different.
不同的目标反馈时隙对应不同的时隙偏移值集合,可以使得不同的目标反馈时隙上的反馈比特可以不同,从而可以节省信令开销。Different target feedback time slots correspond to different time slot offset value sets, so that the feedback bits on different target feedback time slots can be different, thereby saving signaling overhead.
结合第九种可能的实现方式,在第十种可能的实现方式中,所述从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合,可以包括:根据所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。With reference to the ninth possible implementation manner, in a tenth possible implementation manner, the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from multiple time slot offset value sets may include : Determine the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from the multiple time slot offset value sets according to the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set.
结合第七种至第十种中任意一种可能的实现方式,在第十一种可能的实现方式中,所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系可以是根据通信协议预先配置的,或可以是根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。In combination with any one of the seventh to tenth possible implementation manners, in the eleventh possible implementation manner, the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier may be pre-configured according to the communication protocol , Or can be pre-configured according to the signaling sent by the network side device.
第一方面或第二方面中,可选地,所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系可以是根据通信协议预先配置的,或可以是根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。In the first or second aspect, optionally, the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set may be pre-configured according to a communication protocol, or may be based on signaling sent by a network side device Pre-configured.
第一方面或第二方面中,可选地,所述配置分组标识可以为多个配置分组标识中的一个,索引的奇偶性不同的时隙关联所述多个配置分组标识中不同的配置分组标识。In the first aspect or the second aspect, optionally, the configuration group identifier may be one of a plurality of configuration group identifiers, and time slots with different parities of the index are associated with different configuration groups in the plurality of configuration group identifiers. Logo.
第一方面或第二方面中,可选地,所述配置分组标识可以为多个配置分组标识中的一个,其中,所述多个配置分组标识中任意配置分组标识所关联的第一时隙与所述任意配置分组标识所关联的第二时隙之间,有且仅有一个所述多个配置分组标识中其他配置分组标识所关联的时隙,其中,所述第一时隙为所述任意配置分组标识所关联的任意时隙,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后第一个与所述任意配置分组标识关联的时隙。In the first or second aspect, optionally, the configuration group identifier may be one of a plurality of configuration group identifiers, wherein the first time slot associated with any configuration group identifier in the plurality of configuration group identifiers Between the second time slots associated with the arbitrary configuration group identifier, there is one and only one time slot associated with other configuration group identifiers in the plurality of configuration group identifiers, where the first time slot is all For any time slot associated with the arbitrary configuration group identifier, the second time slot is the first time slot associated with the arbitrary configuration group identifier after the first time slot.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是能够用在终端设备内的芯片。该装置具有实现上述第一方面,及各种可能的实现方式的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上 述功能相对应的模块或单元。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided. The device may be a terminal device or a chip that can be used in the terminal device. The device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned first aspect and various possible implementation manners. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
在一种可能的设计中,该装置可以包括:通信单元和处理单元。所述通信单元例如可以是接收单元、发送单元、收发器、接收器、发射器中的至少一种,该通信单元可以包括射频电路或天线。该处理单元可以是处理器。在本设计中,该装置可以为终端设备。In a possible design, the device may include a communication unit and a processing unit. The communication unit may be, for example, at least one of a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter, and the communication unit may include a radio frequency circuit or an antenna. The processing unit may be a processor. In this design, the device can be a terminal device.
可选地,所述装置还可以包括存储单元,该存储单元例如可以是存储器。当包括存储单元时,该存储单元用于存储指令。该处理单元与该存储单元连接,该处理单元可以执行该存储单元存储的指令或源自其他的指令,以使该装置执行上述第一方面,及各种可能的实现方式的方法。存储单元可以是ROM或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,RAM等。Optionally, the device may further include a storage unit, and the storage unit may be a memory, for example. When a storage unit is included, the storage unit is used to store instructions. The processing unit is connected to the storage unit, and the processing unit can execute instructions stored in the storage unit or instructions derived from other sources, so that the device executes the foregoing first aspect and various possible implementation methods. The storage unit may be ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
在另一种可能的设计中,当该装置为芯片或芯片系统时,该装置可以包括:通信单元和处理单元。通信单元例如可以是该芯片或芯片系统上作为通信接口的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。处理单元例如可以是处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路。该处理单元可执行指令,以使终端设备内的芯片执行上述第一方面,以及任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In another possible design, when the device is a chip or a chip system, the device may include: a communication unit and a processing unit. The communication unit may be, for example, an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin, or a related circuit as a communication interface on the chip or chip system. The processing unit may be, for example, a processor, a processing circuit, or a logic circuit. The processing unit can execute instructions so that the chip in the terminal device executes the above-mentioned first aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner.
可选地,该处理单元可以执行存储单元中的指令,该存储单元可以为芯片内的存储单元,如寄存器、缓存等。该存储单元还可以是位于路边单元内,但位于芯片外部,如ROM或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,RAM等。Optionally, the processing unit may execute instructions in a storage unit, and the storage unit may be a storage unit in a chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like. The storage unit may also be located in the roadside unit but outside the chip, such as ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
其中,上述任一处提到的处理器,可以是一个CPU,微处理器,ASIC,或一个或多个用于控制上述第一方面中的方法的程序执行的集成电路。Wherein, the processor mentioned in any of the foregoing may be a CPU, a microprocessor, an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits used to control the execution of the program of the method in the foregoing first aspect.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置可以是网络设备,也可以是能够应用在网络设备内的芯片。该装置具有实现上述第二方面,及各种可能的实现方式的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided. The device may be a network device or a chip that can be used in the network device. The device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned second aspect and various possible implementation modes. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
在一种可能的设计中,该装置可以包括:通信单元和处理单元。所述通信单元例如可以是接收单元、发送单元、收发器、接收器、发射器中的至少一种,该通信单元可以包括射频电路或天线。该处理单元可以是处理器。在本设计中,该装置可以为网络设备。In a possible design, the device may include a communication unit and a processing unit. The communication unit may be, for example, at least one of a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter, and the communication unit may include a radio frequency circuit or an antenna. The processing unit may be a processor. In this design, the device can be a network device.
可选地,所述装置还可以包括存储单元,该存储单元例如可以是存储器。当包括存储单元时,该存储单元用于存储指令。该处理单元与该存储单元连接,该处理单元可以执行该存储单元存储的指令或源自其他的指令,以使该装置执行上述第二方面,及各种可能的实现方式的方法。存储单元可以是ROM或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,RAM等。Optionally, the device may further include a storage unit, and the storage unit may be a memory, for example. When a storage unit is included, the storage unit is used to store instructions. The processing unit is connected to the storage unit, and the processing unit can execute instructions stored in the storage unit or from other instructions, so that the device executes the above-mentioned second aspect and various possible implementation methods. The storage unit may be ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
在另一种可能的设计中,当该装置为芯片或芯片系统时,该装置包括:通信单元和处理单元。通信单元例如可以是该芯片或芯片系统上作为通信接口的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。处理单元例如可以是处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路。该处理单元可执行指令,以使网络设备内的该芯片执行上述第二方面,以及任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In another possible design, when the device is a chip or a chip system, the device includes a communication unit and a processing unit. The communication unit may be, for example, an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin, or a related circuit as a communication interface on the chip or chip system. The processing unit may be, for example, a processor, a processing circuit, or a logic circuit. The processing unit can execute instructions so that the chip in the network device executes the second aspect described above and the method in any possible implementation manner.
可选地,该处理单元可以执行存储单元中的指令,该存储单元可以为芯片内的存储单元,如寄存器、缓存等。该存储单元还可以是位于终端设备内,但位于芯片外部,如ROM或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,RAM等。Optionally, the processing unit may execute instructions in a storage unit, and the storage unit may be a storage unit in a chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like. The storage unit may also be located in the terminal device but outside the chip, such as ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
其中,上述任一处提到的处理器,可以是一个CPU,微处理器,ASIC,或一个或多个用于控制上述各方面方法的程序执行的集成电路。Wherein, the processor mentioned in any of the foregoing may be a CPU, a microprocessor, an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits used to control the execution of the programs of the foregoing methods.
第五方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有程序。该程序被处理器执行时,实现执行上述任意一方面所述的通信方法的步骤。In a fifth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, and the computer-readable storage medium stores a program. When the program is executed by the processor, the steps of the communication method described in any aspect of the foregoing are implemented.
例如,该计算机可读介质中可以存储计算机程序,该计算机程序包括用于执行第一方面中的方法的指令。For example, the computer-readable medium may store a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the method in the first aspect.
例如,该计算机可读介质中可以存储计算机程序,该计算机程序包括用于执行第二方面中的方法的指令。For example, the computer-readable medium may store a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the method in the second aspect.
第六方面,本申请提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品。当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述各方面中的方法。In the sixth aspect, this application provides a computer program product containing instructions. When the computer program product runs on the computer, the computer is caused to execute the methods in the above aspects.
例如,该计算机程序产品在计算机上执行时,使得计算机执行第一方面中的方法。For example, when the computer program product is executed on a computer, the computer executes the method in the first aspect.
例如,该计算机程序产品在计算机上执行时,使得计算机执行第二方面中的方法。For example, when the computer program product is executed on a computer, the computer executes the method in the second aspect.
第七方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括前述的任意一种或多种装置。In a seventh aspect, a communication system is provided, including any one or more of the aforementioned devices.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是多站协作传输的一种场景示例图;Figure 1 is an example diagram of a scenario of multi-station cooperative transmission;
图2是本申请一个实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请一个实施例的反馈时隙与接收时机的关系示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the feedback time slot and the receiving timing of an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请一个实施例的时域资源分配方式的示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a time domain resource allocation method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请一个实施例的接收时机的示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of receiving timing of an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请一个实施例的接收时机的排序示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a sequence of receiving timings according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请一个实施例的HARQ反馈信息与接收时机的关系示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between HARQ feedback information and receiving timing according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请另一个实施例的HARQ反馈信息与接收时机的关系示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between HARQ feedback information and receiving timing according to another embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请一个实施例的站点与时隙的关系示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between stations and time slots according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请另一个实施例的站点与时隙的关系示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between stations and time slots according to another embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请另一个实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请一个实施例的通信装置的示意性结构图;FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请一个实施例的终端设备的示意性结构图;FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14是本申请一个实施例的网络设备的示意性结构图。FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th Generation,5G)系统、新无线(New Radio,NR)或者未来网络系统等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, for example: Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (Time Division Duplex) , TDD), Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) communication system, 5th Generation (5G) system, New Radio (New Radio) , NR) or future network systems.
本申请实施例中的终端设备可以指用户设备、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用 户装置。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may refer to user equipment, access terminals, user units, user stations, mobile stations, mobile stations, remote stations, remote terminals, mobile equipment, user terminals, terminals, wireless communication equipment, user agents, or User device. The terminal device can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, a personal digital processing (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), with wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network, or future evolution of the public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) Terminal equipment, etc., this embodiment of the application does not limit this.
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备,该网络设备可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional NodeB,eNB或eNodeB),还可以是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备,5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)等,本申请实施例并不限定。The network equipment in the embodiments of the present application may be equipment used to communicate with terminal equipment. The network equipment may be an evolved base station (Evolutional NodeB, eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE system, or a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN) scenario wireless controller, or the network equipment can be relay station, access point, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment and network equipment in 5G network or network equipment in future evolution PLMN network, 5G One or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the system, or may also be a network node constituting a gNB or transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (distributed unit). unit, DU), etc., the embodiments of the present application are not limited.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+AAU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU. The gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU). CU implements part of the functions of gNB, and DU implements part of the functions of gNB. For example, the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC), packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions. The DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and realizes the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer, and physical (PHY) layer. AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by DU , Or, sent by DU+AAU. It can be understood that the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), or the CU can be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
在本申请实施例中,终端或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层,以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit,MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统,例如,Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且,本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端或网络设备,或者,是终端或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。In the embodiments of the present application, the terminal or network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. The hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also referred to as main memory). The operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, for example, Linux operating system, Unix operating system, Android operating system, iOS operating system, or windows operating system. The application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software. In addition, the embodiments of the application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application can be provided according to the embodiments of the application. For example, the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal or network device that can call and execute the program.
另外,本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile  disc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。In addition, various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices, or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques. The term "article of manufacture" used in this application encompasses a computer program that can be accessed from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium. For example, computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD)) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.). In addition, various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于多站协作传输(coordinated multiple points transmission/reception,CoMP)的场景。多站协作传输也可以称为多站协同传输。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to scenarios of coordinated multiple points transmission/reception (CoMP). Multi-station coordinated transmission can also be called multi-station coordinated transmission.
多站协作传输技术包括协同波束成型(coordinated beamforming)、协同调度(coordinated scheduling)、联合传输(joint transmission)、动态传输点选择(dynamic point selection)、动态传输点静默(dynamic point blanking)等技术。Multi-station coordinated transmission technologies include coordinated beamforming, coordinated scheduling, joint transmission, dynamic point selection, dynamic point blanking, and other technologies.
图1是多站协作传输的一种场景示例图。如图1所示,由地理位置上分离的多个传输点101,协同参与为一个终端102传输数据或者联合接收一个终端发送的数据。应理解,图1所示的场景中,可以包括更多的传输点101。Figure 1 is an example diagram of a scenario of multi-station cooperative transmission. As shown in Fig. 1, multiple transmission points 101 separated geographically cooperate to transmit data for one terminal 102 or jointly receive data sent by one terminal. It should be understood that in the scenario shown in FIG. 1, more transmission points 101 may be included.
下面以终端为例介绍本申请一个实施例的通信方法。其他设备传输HARQ反馈信息的方法类似。The following uses a terminal as an example to introduce the communication method of an embodiment of the present application. The method of transmitting HARQ feedback information for other devices is similar.
图2为本申请一个实施例的通信方法的示例性流程图。应理解,图2示出了该方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请提出的技术方案还可以执行其他操作或者图2中的各个操作的变形。Fig. 2 is an exemplary flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the application. It should be understood that FIG. 2 shows the steps or operations of the method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the technical solution proposed in this application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 2.
S210,终端接收配置分组标识。S210: The terminal receives the configuration group identifier.
本实施例的通信方法中,将配置(configuration,config)分组,并给不同配置分组分配不同的标识(identity,ID),配置分组的标识简称为配置分组标识。In the communication method of this embodiment, configurations (configuration, config) are grouped, and different configuration groups are assigned different identities (IDs), and the identity of the configuration group is referred to as the configuration group identifier for short.
例如,可以对物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)配置(config)分组,不同的PDCCH config即为一组,PDCCH config ID即为配置分组标识。For example, the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) configuration (config) group can be grouped, and different PDCCH configs are a group, and the PDCCH config ID is the configuration group identifier.
又如,可以对CORESET分组,CORESET高层参数索引即为配置分组标识。可选地,CORESET高层参数索引的一种示例为CORESET group ID。For another example, CORESET can be grouped, and the CORESET high-level parameter index is the configuration group identifier. Optionally, an example of CORESET high-level parameter index is CORESET group ID.
又如,可以认为CORESET id即为配置分组标识。For another example, CORESET id can be considered as the configuration group identifier.
又如,可以对PUCCH资源指示信息(PUCCH resource indicator)分组,不同范围内的PUCCH resource indicator属于不同的配置分组。For another example, PUCCH resource indicator information (PUCCH resource indicator) can be grouped, and PUCCH resource indicators in different ranges belong to different configuration groups.
又如,可以对物理下行数据信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)config分组,PDSCH config ID即为配置分组标识。For another example, physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) config groups can be configured, and the PDSCH config ID is the configuration group identifier.
或者,可以给时隙偏移值集合分配标识,并将时隙偏移值集合的标识作为配置分组标识。时隙偏移值集合的标识的一种示例为索引。例如,终端上配置有两个时隙偏移值集合时,一个时隙偏移值集合的索引可以为0,另一个时隙偏移值集合的索引可以为1。这种情况下,配置分组标识可以为0或1。Alternatively, an identifier may be assigned to the slot offset value set, and the identifier of the slot offset value set may be used as the configuration group identifier. An example of the identification of the slot offset value set is an index. For example, when two time slot offset value sets are configured on the terminal, the index of one time slot offset value set may be 0, and the index of the other time slot offset value set may be 1. In this case, the configuration group identifier can be 0 or 1.
或者,可以给时隙偏移值集合分配标识,并将时隙偏移值集合的标识作为配置分组标识。时隙偏移值集合的标识的一种示例为CORESET中所配置的高层参数索引。例如,终端上配置有两个时隙偏移值集合时,一个时隙偏移值集合的标识可以为CORESET中的高层参数索引0,另一个时隙偏移值集合的标识可以为CORESET中的高层参数索引1。这种情况下,配置分组标识可以为CORESET中的高层参数索引或者时隙偏移值集合的标识。Alternatively, an identifier may be assigned to the slot offset value set, and the identifier of the slot offset value set may be used as the configuration group identifier. An example of the identification of the slot offset value set is the high-level parameter index configured in CORESET. For example, when two timeslot offset value sets are configured on the terminal, the identifier of one timeslot offset value set may be the high-level parameter index 0 in CORESET, and the identifier of the other timeslot offset value set may be the identifier in CORESET High-level parameter index 1. In this case, the configuration group identifier can be the high-level parameter index in CORESET or the identifier of the slot offset value set.
时隙偏移值集合也可称为时隙时序集合(K1 set)。时隙偏移值集合中包括一个或多 个元素(K1),每个元素为一个时隙偏移值。时隙偏移值集合中的每个元素(K1)表示的含义是:PDSCH和反馈其相应的HARQ-ACK信息的PUCCH或者PUSCH之间的时隙偏移值。The slot offset value set may also be referred to as a slot timing set (K1 set). The slot offset value set includes one or more elements (K1), and each element is a slot offset value. The meaning of each element (K1) in the slot offset value set is: the slot offset value between the PDSCH and the PUCCH or PUSCH that feeds back its corresponding HARQ-ACK information.
进一步地,不同的配置分组标识可以分别对应不同的网络设备。换句话说,终端可以根据不同配置分组标识所对应的配置与不同的网络设备进行信息传输。Further, different configuration group identifiers may correspond to different network devices. In other words, the terminal can perform information transmission with different network devices according to configurations corresponding to different configuration group identifiers.
S220,终端在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,所述下行数据传输与所述配置分组标识对应。S220: The terminal sends HARQ feedback information of downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, where the downlink data transmission corresponds to the configuration group identifier.
其中,所述下行数据传输与所述配置分组标识对应,是指所述下行数据传输为通过所述配置分组标识对应的配置传输的下行控制信息调度的下行数据传输,或者指所述下行数据传输为通过所述配置分组标识对应的配置传输的下行数据传输。Wherein, the downlink data transmission corresponding to the configuration group identifier means that the downlink data transmission is the downlink data transmission scheduled by the downlink control information of the configuration transmission corresponding to the configuration group identifier, or refers to the downlink data transmission It is the downlink data transmission transmitted through the configuration group identifier corresponding to the configuration.
例如,所述配置分组标识为CORESET group ID时,所述配置分组标识与所述下行数据传输对应,可以包含如下含义:调度该下行数据传输的下行控制信息为第一下行控制信息,第一下行控制信息的时频资源所关联的CORESET group ID为所述配置分组标识。For example, when the configuration group ID is CORESET group ID, the configuration group ID corresponds to the downlink data transmission and may include the following meaning: the downlink control information for scheduling the downlink data transmission is the first downlink control information, and the first The CORESET group ID associated with the time-frequency resource of the downlink control information is the configuration group ID.
又如,所述配置分组标识为PUCCH resource indicator时,所述配置分组标识与所述下行数据传输对应,可以包含如下含义:调度该下行数据传输的下行控制信息中的PUCCH resource indicator域中的值为所述配置分组标识。For another example, when the configuration group identifier is PUCCH resource indicator, the configuration group identifier corresponds to the downlink data transmission and may include the following meaning: the value in the PUCCH resource indicator field in the downlink control information for scheduling the downlink data transmission Identify the configuration group.
此处所述的下行数据传输的一种示例为PDSCH;HARQ反馈信息的一种示例为混合自动重传请求确认(HARQ-ACK)信息。An example of downlink data transmission described here is PDSCH; an example of HARQ feedback information is hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement (HARQ-ACK) information.
本实施例中,所述配置分组标识关联的时隙为上行时隙,此处所述的上行时隙可以指包含了上行符号的时隙。上行符号的一种示例为上行正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)。In this embodiment, the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier is an uplink time slot, and the uplink time slot mentioned here may refer to a time slot containing uplink symbols. An example of the uplink symbol is uplink orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM).
该方法中,由于在配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,能够根据不同的配置分组标识进行反馈的区分,因此,不同的网络设备调度下行数据传输时,不同的网络设备调度的下行数据传输所对应的HARQ反馈信息可以分别在不同的时隙上传输,从而可以避免HARQ反馈资源的冲突,进而可以提高HARQ反馈信息的反馈性能。In this method, since HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission is sent in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, the feedback can be differentiated according to different configuration group identifiers. Therefore, when different network devices schedule downlink data transmission, different networks The HARQ feedback information corresponding to the downlink data transmission scheduled by the device can be respectively transmitted in different time slots, so that the conflict of the HARQ feedback resources can be avoided, and the feedback performance of the HARQ feedback information can be improved.
本申请实施例中,终端在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息时,可以通过多种方式实现。In the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal sends the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, it can be implemented in various ways.
下面分别介绍HARQ反馈码本为半静态码本和动态码本情况下,终端在接收到的配置分组标识所关联的时隙,发送所述配置分组标识对应的下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息的实现方式。The following describes the implementation of HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission corresponding to the received configuration group identifier when the HARQ feedback codebook is a semi-static codebook and a dynamic codebook. the way.
半静态码本是指HARQ-ACK码本大小不会随实际的数据调度情况动态改变。半静态的HARQ-ACK码本大小通常是根据协议预定义的或是根据RRC配置信令中的参数来确定的。The semi-static codebook means that the size of the HARQ-ACK codebook will not dynamically change with the actual data scheduling situation. The size of the semi-static HARQ-ACK codebook is usually predefined according to the protocol or determined according to the parameters in the RRC configuration signaling.
动态码本是指HARQ-ACK码本大小会随着实际的数据调度情况动态而改变。动态HARQ-ACK码本大小通常是基于DCI中的下行分配索引(downlink assignment index,DAI)域生成的。The dynamic codebook means that the size of the HARQ-ACK codebook will dynamically change with the actual data scheduling situation. The dynamic HARQ-ACK codebook size is usually generated based on the downlink assignment index (DAI) field in the DCI.
下面先介绍HARQ反馈码本为半静态码本情况下,终端在接收到的配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送所述配置分组标识对应的下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息的实现方式。In the following, in the case where the HARQ feedback codebook is a semi-static codebook, the terminal sends the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission corresponding to the configuration group identifier in the time slot associated with the received configuration group identifier.
简而言之,终端根据时隙偏移值集合确定上行时隙对应的下行数据接收时机,以及根据所述上行时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述上行时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。这里所述的上行时隙为包括上行符号的时隙。为了后续描述方便,后续实施例中将确定下行数据接收时机时所针对的上行时隙称为待反馈时隙。In short, the terminal determines the downlink data reception timing corresponding to the uplink time slot according to the time slot offset value set, and according to the association relationship between the uplink time slot and the configuration group identifier, transmits the HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission. The uplink time slot mentioned here is a time slot including uplink symbols. For the convenience of subsequent description, in the subsequent embodiments, the uplink time slot for which the downlink data reception timing is determined is referred to as the time slot to be feedback.
也就是说,在半静态码本情况下,先确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据传输接收时机,再确定该接收时机上有没有接收到该待反馈时隙关联的配置分组标识所对应的下行数据传输。若接收到,则发送HARQ反馈信息,且该HARQ反馈信息携带该下行数据传输的实际接收状态。若没接收到,则发送NACK信息。That is to say, in the case of a semi-static codebook, first determine the downlink data transmission and reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back, and then determine whether the downlink data corresponding to the configuration group identifier associated with the time slot to be fed back is received at the receiving timing. data transmission. If received, the HARQ feedback information is sent, and the HARQ feedback information carries the actual reception status of the downlink data transmission. If not received, then send NACK message.
HARQ反馈码本为半静态码本情况下,且终端上配置一个K1 set时,终端发送HARQ反馈信息的实现方式如下。When the HARQ feedback codebook is a semi-static codebook and a K1 set is configured on the terminal, the terminal sends HARQ feedback information in the following manner.
终端根据K1 set确定待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机。其中,该K1 set可以是终端根据通信协议预先配置的,或者,可以是终端根据网络设备发送的无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令中的参数配置的。The terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the K1 set. Wherein, the K1 set may be pre-configured by the terminal according to the communication protocol, or may be configured by the terminal according to parameters in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling sent by the network device.
终端根据K1 set确定待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机的一种实现方式如下。An implementation manner for the terminal to determine the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the K1 set is as follows.
终端按照K1 set中的K1从大到小的顺序,对于K1 set中的每一个K1,执行下面3个操作中全部或部分操作。The terminal performs all or part of the following three operations for each K1 in the K1 set according to the order of K1 in the K1 set from large to small.
1.根据待反馈时隙的时隙号(记为slot NU)、K1以及上下行子载波间隔(subcarrier spacing,SCS),计算得到该待反馈时隙对应的下行时隙的时隙号(记为slot ND)。该待反馈时隙对应的下行时隙可以称为该待反馈时隙对应的HARQ-ACK窗口。或者说,该slot ND对应的时隙属于HARQ-ACK窗口。1. According to the time slot number of the time slot to be fed back (denoted as slot NU), K1 and uplink and downlink subcarrier spacing (subcarrier spacing, SCS), calculate the time slot number of the downlink time slot corresponding to the time slot to be fed back (denoted as slot NU) Is slot ND). The downlink time slot corresponding to the time slot to be fed back may be referred to as the HARQ-ACK window corresponding to the time slot to be fed back. In other words, the time slot corresponding to the slot ND belongs to the HARQ-ACK window.
如图3所示,K1 set={2,3,4},则当上下行SCS相同时,由slot ND=slot UD-K1可知,slot NU为slot 4的时隙对应的HARQ-ACK窗口包括slot 0,slot 1和slot 2,slot NU为slot6的时隙对应的HARQ-ACK窗口包括slot 2,slot 3和slot 4。其中,K1表示由PDSCH所占的时隙到上报该PDSCH的HARQ-ACK的时隙间隔。As shown in Figure 3, K1 set={2,3,4}, when the uplink and downlink SCS are the same, it can be seen from slot ND=slot UD-K1 that the HARQ-ACK window corresponding to the time slot in which slot NU is slot 4 includes Slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2, slot NU is slot 6 The corresponding HARQ-ACK window includes slot 2, slot 3, and slot 4. Among them, K1 represents the time slot interval from the time slot occupied by the PDSCH to the HARQ-ACK reporting the PDSCH.
应理解,如果上下行SCS不同,即slot的时间长度也是不同的,其上下行的slot号是不一样的,此时,K1参数对应的时隙偏移以PUCCH或者PUSCH对应的参数(numerology)来确定的。例如,PDSCH所占的时隙的slot ND是根据上行slot NU和K1计算得到的slot NU-K1所对应的一个或多个下行时隙slot ND的集合。It should be understood that if the uplink and downlink SCS are different, that is, the time length of the slot is different, and the slot number of the uplink and downlink is different. At this time, the time slot offset corresponding to the K1 parameter is based on the parameter corresponding to PUCCH or PUSCH (numerology) To be sure. For example, the slot ND of the time slot occupied by the PDSCH is a set of one or more downlink time slot slots ND corresponding to the slot NU-K1 calculated according to the uplink slots NU and K1.
2.终端针对每个slot ND,根据RRC参数中的PDSCH时域资源分配列表(PDSCH-timeDomainResourceAllocationList)和上下行配比(TDD-UL-DL-Config),判断出一共最多可以有M个PDSCH在时域上不重叠,并按照一定的顺序排列。2. For each slot ND, according to the PDSCH time domain resource allocation list (PDSCH-timeDomainResourceAllocationList) and uplink-downlink configuration (TDD-UL-DL-Config) in the RRC parameters, the terminal judges that there can be at most M PDSCHs in total. There is no overlap in the time domain, and they are arranged in a certain order.
PDSCH-timeDomainResourceAllocationList是一个列表,里面包含了多个元素,每个元素指示了PDSCH时域分配的起始符号和所占符号长度。PDSCH-timeDomainResourceAllocationList is a list that contains multiple elements, and each element indicates the starting symbol and the symbol length of the PDSCH time domain allocation.
例如,假设所有的PDSCH时域资源分配列表为R,则对于R中任何一种时域资源分配方式而言,如果该时域资源分配中的某个符号被配置成上行符号,则该时域资源分配上是不可以分配PDSCH的,即从R中移除该时域资源分配,从而保证R中剩下的时域分配都是可以用于下行数据传输的。其中,R中所有时域资源分配方式通常都是在同一个时隙内。For example, assuming that all PDSCH time domain resource allocation lists are R, for any time domain resource allocation method in R, if a symbol in the time domain resource allocation is configured as an uplink symbol, then the time domain In terms of resource allocation, PDSCH cannot be allocated, that is, the time domain resource allocation is removed from R, so as to ensure that the remaining time domain allocation in R can be used for downlink data transmission. Among them, all time domain resource allocation methods in R are usually in the same time slot.
R中的时域资源分配方式的一种示例如图4所示。其中,同一种填充内容的格子表示 一种时域资源分配方式,图4中包括6种时域资源分配方式。An example of time-domain resource allocation in R is shown in Figure 4. Among them, the same type of grid with filled content represents a time domain resource allocation method, and Figure 4 includes six time domain resource allocation methods.
R中剩下的时域分配可以记为R1。以图4为例,由于第一种时域资源分配方式中包含了上行符号,因此可以将其从R中删除,这样R1中包括第二种至第六种时域资源分配方式。The remaining time domain allocation in R can be denoted as R1. Taking FIG. 4 as an example, since the uplink symbol is included in the first time domain resource allocation method, it can be deleted from R, so that R1 includes the second to sixth time domain resource allocation methods.
得到R1之后,终端根据自己的能力是否支持1个时隙中传输多个PDSCH有不同的操作。After obtaining R1, the terminal has different operations according to whether it supports the transmission of multiple PDSCHs in one time slot according to its own capabilities.
如果不支持,当R1中不为空时,则将R1中所有时域分配方式记为同一个候选的PDSCH接收时机。以图4,若终端不支持,则第二种至第六种时域资源分配方式为一个候选的PDSCH接收时机。If it is not supported, when R1 is not empty, all time domain allocation modes in R1 are recorded as the same candidate PDSCH reception opportunity. In Figure 4, if the terminal does not support it, the second to sixth time domain resource allocation methods are a candidate PDSCH reception opportunity.
如果支持,首先找到R1中时域资源分配满足预设规则(例如,时域资源分配最早结束)的一个时域资源分配方式A,将其标记为候选的PDSCH接收时机j,对于R1中与A有时域重叠的时域资源分配方式也同样为标记PDSCH接收时机j,从而得到一个PDSCH接收时机,该PDSCH接收时机对应一组时域资源,并从R中移除已被标记的时域资源分配方式。对R1中的时域资源分配列表重复本步骤,直至R为空。If supported, first find a time-domain resource allocation method A in R1 that meets the preset rules (for example, the earliest end of time-domain resource allocation) in R1, and mark it as a candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity j. For R1 and A Sometimes the time domain resource allocation method with overlapping domains is also to mark the PDSCH reception opportunity j, thereby obtaining a PDSCH reception opportunity, which corresponds to a set of time domain resources, and the marked time domain resource allocation is removed from R the way. Repeat this step for the time domain resource allocation list in R1 until R is empty.
以图4为例,其中,第五种时域资源分配方式最早结束,因此将其标记为候选的PDSCH接收时机1。由于第二种时域资源分配方式和第三种时域资源分配方式与第五种时域资源分配方式有重叠的时域资源,因此,将第二种时域资源分配方式和第三种时域资源分配方式也标记为PDSHC接收时机1。然后从R1中删除这三种时域资源分配方式,此时,R1中包括第四种时域资源分配方式和第六种时域资源分配方式。Taking Figure 4 as an example, the fifth time-domain resource allocation method ends earliest, so it is marked as the candidate PDSCH reception opportunity 1. Since the second and third time-domain resource allocation methods have overlapping time-domain resources with the fifth time-domain resource allocation method, the second time-domain resource allocation method is combined with the third time-domain resource allocation method. The domain resource allocation method is also marked as PDSHC receiving opportunity 1. Then delete these three time domain resource allocation methods from R1. At this time, R1 includes the fourth time domain resource allocation method and the sixth time domain resource allocation method.
由于第四种时域资源分配方式和第六种时域资源分配方式中,第六种时域资源分配方式最早结束,因此将第六种时域资源分配方式记为PDSCH接收时机2。由于第四种时域资源分配方式和第六种时域资源分配方式有重叠的时域资源,因此,将第四种时域资源分配方式也记为PDSCH接收时机2。Because of the fourth time domain resource allocation method and the sixth time domain resource allocation method, the sixth time domain resource allocation method ends earliest, so the sixth time domain resource allocation method is recorded as PDSCH receiving opportunity 2. Since the fourth time-domain resource allocation method and the sixth time-domain resource allocation method have overlapping time-domain resources, the fourth time-domain resource allocation method is also recorded as PDSCH receiving opportunity 2.
应理解,此时得到的PDSCH接收时机是按照上述计算方法得到PDSCH接收时机的先后顺序排序的。It should be understood that the PDSCH reception timings obtained at this time are sorted according to the sequence of the PDSCH reception timings obtained by the foregoing calculation method.
应理解,之所以将时域资源重复的PDSCH时域分配方式标记为同一个PDSCH接收时机,主要是因为在现有协议限制不允许多个PDSCH在时域上有重叠。It should be understood that the reason why the PDSCH time-domain allocation method with repeated time-domain resources is marked as the same PDSCH reception opportunity is mainly because the existing protocol restrictions do not allow multiple PDSCHs to overlap in the time domain.
3.将得到的PDSCH接收时机按照预设规则(例如,小区标识(cell id)从小到大)进行排列。3. Arrange the obtained PDSCH reception occasions according to a preset rule (for example, the cell id from small to large).
针对K1 set中每个K1执行上述3个操作后得到的所有PDSCH接收时机即构成PDSCH接收时机集合。总体来说,如图5所示,PDSCH接收时机集合中,PDSCH接收时机的排序是按照对应K1的值从大到小(即下行slot从小到大)的顺序排序的。All PDSCH reception opportunities obtained after performing the above 3 operations for each K1 in the K1 set constitute a PDSCH reception opportunity set. In general, as shown in FIG. 5, in the PDSCH receiving timing set, the PDSCH receiving timing is sorted according to the value of the corresponding K1 from large to small (that is, the downlink slot is from small to large).
当多个小区服务终端且终端需要向这多个小区上报HARQ反馈信息时,终端可以按照小区标识从小到大的顺序依次排列PDSCH接收时机集合中的PDSCH接收时机,如图6所示。When multiple cells serve the terminal and the terminal needs to report HARQ feedback information to the multiple cells, the terminal can sequentially arrange the PDSCH reception opportunities in the PDSCH reception time set in the order of the cell identifiers from small to large, as shown in FIG. 6.
假设根据上述方式为待反馈时隙确定的PDSCH接收时机如图7所示,其中,待反馈时隙为slot 4,PDSCH接收时机1位于slot 0中,则接下来,终端判断PDSCH接收时机1处有没有该待反馈时隙所对应的下行数据传输。若有,则在slot 4发送该下行数据传输的实际HARQ反馈信息,例如发送HARQ-ACK;若没有,则在slot 4发送该下行数据传输 的HARQ反馈信息,且该HARQ反馈信息为NACK。Assuming that the PDSCH receiving timing determined for the time slot to be fed back according to the above method is shown in Figure 7, where the time slot to be fed back is slot 4, and the PDSCH receiving timing 1 is in slot 0, then the terminal determines the PDSCH receiving timing 1 Whether there is downlink data transmission corresponding to the time slot to be fed back. If yes, send the actual HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in slot 4, for example, send HARQ-ACK; if not, send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in slot 4, and the HARQ feedback information is NACK.
终端根据该K1 set确定待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机集合之后,可以根据待反馈时隙与配置分组标识之间的关联关系判断待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机处有没有待反馈时隙对应的下行数据传输。其中,待反馈时隙与配置分组标识(例如CORESET group id、CORESET id或PDCCH config id)之间的关联关系可以是终端根据通信协议预先配置的,或可以是终端根据RRC信令预先配置的。After the terminal determines the PDSCH receiving time set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the K1 set, it can determine whether there is a time slot to be fed back at the PDSCH receiving time corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier Corresponding downlink data transmission. Wherein, the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group ID (for example, CORESET group id, CORESET id, or PDCCH config id) may be pre-configured by the terminal according to the communication protocol, or may be pre-configured by the terminal according to RRC signaling.
例如,若该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机处接收到该配置分组标识对应的PDSCH,且该待反馈时隙与该配置分组标识之间存在关联关系,则说明该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机处有该待反馈时隙所对应的PDSCH,可以在该待反馈时隙发送该PDSCH的实际HARQ-ACK信息;否则说明该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机处没有该待反馈时隙所所对应的PDSCH,并在该待反馈时隙反馈NACK。For example, if the PDSCH corresponding to the configuration group identifier is received at the PDSCH receiving time corresponding to the time slot to be fed back, and there is an association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier, it means that the time slot to be fed back corresponds to The PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back is available at the PDSCH receiving time, and the actual HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH can be sent in the time slot to be fed back; otherwise, it means that there is no time to be fed back at the PDSCH receiving time corresponding to the time slot to be fed back The PDSCH corresponding to the slot, and NACK is fed back in the time slot to be fed back.
可选地,该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机处接收到该配置分组标识对应的PDSCH的情况下,可以进一步判断该PDSCH接收时机与其他上行时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机是否有重叠,其中,该待反馈时隙与该其他时隙关联同一个配置分组标识。即判断不同的待反馈时隙分别对应的PDSCH接收时机是否有重叠(例如,不同的PUCCH对应的PDSCH接收时机是否有重叠)。Optionally, in the case that the PDSCH corresponding to the configuration group identifier is received at the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back, it may be further determined whether the PDSCH receiving timing overlaps with the PDSCH receiving timings corresponding to other uplink time slots, where , The time slot to be fed back is associated with the same configuration group identifier with the other time slots. That is, it is determined whether the PDSCH receiving timings corresponding to different time slots to be fed back respectively overlap (for example, whether the PDSCH receiving timings corresponding to different PUCCHs overlap).
若该PDSCH接收时机与该其他时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机无重叠,则可以在该待反馈时隙发送该PDSCH的实际HARQ-ACK信息;若有重叠,还需执行下面的操作,以确定反馈该PDSCH的实际HARQ-ACK信息的最终时隙。If there is no overlap between the PDSCH reception timing and the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the other time slots, the actual HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH can be sent in the time slot to be fed back; if there is overlap, the following operations need to be performed to determine the feedback The last time slot of the actual HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH.
终端接收网络设备发送的第一信息,第一信息用于指示该PDSCH接收时机处接收的PDSCH与所述PDSCH的HARQ反馈信息所在的反馈时隙之间的第一时隙偏移值(K1)在时隙偏移值集合中的索引。终端根据第一信息确定PDSCH的目标反馈时隙,该目标反馈时隙可以理解为网络设备指示的、用于发送该PDSCH的HARQ反馈信息的时隙。例如,在上下行子载波间隔相等的情况下,在该PDSCH接收时机所在时隙的时隙号加上第一信息指示的第一时隙偏移值得到目标反馈时隙的时隙号,该PDSCH接收时机所在时隙的时隙号通常是根据上下行参数换算得到的。The terminal receives the first information sent by the network device, the first information is used to indicate the first time slot offset value (K1) between the PDSCH received at the PDSCH receiving time and the feedback time slot where the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH is located Index in the slot offset value set. The terminal determines the target feedback time slot of the PDSCH according to the first information, and the target feedback time slot may be understood as the time slot indicated by the network device for sending the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH. For example, when the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are equal, the time slot number of the time slot where the PDSCH reception opportunity is located is added to the first time slot offset value indicated by the first information to obtain the time slot number of the target feedback time slot. The time slot number of the time slot where the PDSCH receiving time is located is usually obtained by conversion based on uplink and downlink parameters.
若根据第一信息确定PDSCH的目标反馈时隙与上述待反馈时隙是同一个时隙,则在该待反馈时隙发送该PDSCH的HARQ反馈信息;若根据第一信息确定PDSCH的目标反馈时隙与上述待反馈时隙不是同一个时隙,且目标反馈时隙与该PDSCH对应的配置分组标识关联,则在目标反馈时隙上发送该PDSCH的HARQ反馈信息。If it is determined according to the first information that the PDSCH target feedback time slot is the same time slot as the aforementioned time slot to be fed back, then the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH is sent in the time slot to be fed back; if the target feedback of the PDSCH is determined according to the first information The slot and the above-mentioned time slot to be fed back are not the same time slot, and the target feedback time slot is associated with the configuration group identifier corresponding to the PDSCH, and the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH is sent on the target feedback time slot.
如图8所示,假设K1 set={2,3,4},则slot 4对应的HARQ-ACK窗口1包括slot 0、slot 1和slot 2,slot 6对应的HARQ-ACK窗口2包括slot 2、slot 3和slot 4。As shown in Figure 8, assuming K1 set={2,3,4}, the HARQ-ACK window 1 corresponding to slot 4 includes slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2, and the HARQ-ACK window 2 corresponding to slot 6 includes slot 2. , Slot 3 and slot 4.
图8中,斜线填充的格子表示slot 4对应的一个PDSCH接收时机,为了描述方便,将该PDSCH接收时机称为PDSCH接收时机1;竖线填充的格子表示slot 6对应的一个PDSCH接收时机,为了描述方便,将该PDSCH接收时机称为PDSCH接收时机2。In Figure 8, the slash-filled grid represents a PDSCH reception timing corresponding to slot 4. For the convenience of description, this PDSCH reception timing is called PDSCH reception timing 1; the vertical line-filled grid represents a PDSCH reception timing corresponding to slot 6. For the convenience of description, this PDSCH reception timing is referred to as PDSCH reception timing 2.
如图8所示,slot 4对应的PDSCH接收时机1与slot 6对应的PDSCH接收时机2在slot 2有重叠,或者说slot 2同时在slot 4和slot 6的HARQ窗口内。As shown in Figure 8, the PDSCH receiving timing 1 corresponding to slot 4 and the PDSCH receiving timing 2 corresponding to slot 6 overlap in slot 2, or slot 2 is in the HARQ window of slot 4 and slot 6 at the same time.
slot 4和slot 6关联相同的配置分组标识的情况下,终端先根据PDSCH接收时机1处接收的PDSCH对应的下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)从K1 set中确 定K1。例如,根据PDSCH接收时机1处接收的PDSCH对应的DCI从K1 set中确定K1为4。假设上下行子载波间隔相等,由2+4等于6且slot 6与该PDSCH对应的配置分组标识关联可知,应该在slot 6反馈PDSCH接收时机1处接收的PDSCH的实际HARQ反馈信息。当然,也会在slot 4上反馈PDSCH接收时机1处接收的PDSCH的HARQ反馈信息,只是该HARQ反馈信息为NACK。When slot 4 and slot 6 are associated with the same configuration group identifier, the terminal first determines K1 from the K1 set according to the downlink control information (DCI) corresponding to the PDSCH received at PDSCH reception opportunity 1. For example, according to the DCI corresponding to the PDSCH received at PDSCH reception timing 1, it is determined that K1 is 4 from the K1 set. Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are equal, 2+4 is equal to 6 and slot 6 is associated with the configuration group identification corresponding to the PDSCH, and it can be known that the actual HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH received at PDSCH reception time 1 should be fed back in slot 6. Of course, the HARQ feedback information of the PDSCH received at PDSCH reception opportunity 1 will also be fed back on slot 4, but the HARQ feedback information is NACK.
HARQ反馈码本为半静态码本情况下,且终端上配置多个K1 set时,终端发送HARQ反馈信息的实现方式,可以参考上述终端上配置一个K1 set时终端发送HARQ反馈信息的实现方式,不同之处在于,终端在确定待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机之前,应从这多个K1 set中先确定该待反馈时隙对应的K1 set,且,在根据第一信息确定目标反馈时隙之前,应从这多个K1 set中先确定该第一信息对应的K1 set。In the case that the HARQ feedback codebook is a semi-static codebook and multiple K1 sets are configured on the terminal, the terminal sends HARQ feedback information for the implementation mode, you can refer to the foregoing implementation mode for the terminal to send HARQ feedback information when one K1 set is configured on the terminal. The difference is that before determining the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back, the terminal should first determine the K1 set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back from among the multiple K1 sets, and determine the target feedback time slot according to the first information Before, the K1 set corresponding to the first information should be determined from the multiple K1 sets.
其中,这多个K1 set可以是终端根据通信协议配置的,也可以是终端RRC参数配置的。这多个K1 set的长度可以不同,或者这多个K1 set中的K1不同。其中,这多个K1 set中的K1不同,可以是所有K1不同,也可以是部分K1不同。Among them, the multiple K1 sets may be configured by the terminal according to the communication protocol, or configured by the terminal RRC parameters. The lengths of the multiple K1 sets may be different, or the K1 in the multiple K1 sets are different. Among them, the K1s in the multiple K1 sets are different. All K1s may be different, or some K1s may be different.
终端从这多个K1 set中确定该待反馈时隙对应的K1 set的一种实现方式中,终端上可以根据通信协议或RRC参数配置有配置分组标识与K1 set的关联关系,且终端根据配置分组标识和该关联关系确定该待反馈时隙对应的K1 set。In an implementation manner in which the terminal determines the K1 set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back from the multiple K1 sets, the terminal can be configured with the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the K1 set according to the communication protocol or RRC parameters, and the terminal is configured according to the configuration The group identifier and the association relationship determine the K1 set corresponding to the time slot to be fed back.
例如,可以给每个K1 set分配一个索引,终端上配置有配置分组标识与K1 set索引的关联关系。这样,终端可以根据待反馈时隙与配置分配标识的关联关系以及该配置分组标识与K1 set索引的关联关系确定该待反馈时隙关联的K1 set。For example, each K1 set may be assigned an index, and the terminal is configured with an association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the K1 set index. In this way, the terminal can determine the K1 set associated with the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration allocation identifier and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the K1 set index.
当然,终端也可以根据其他方式从这多个K1 set中确定出该待反馈时隙关联的K1 set。例如,终端上可以根据通信协议或RRC参数配置有待反馈时隙与K1 set的关联关系。这样,终端可以直接根据该关联关系得知该待反馈时隙关联的K1 set。Of course, the terminal may also determine the K1 set associated with the time slot to be fed back from the multiple K1 sets according to other methods. For example, the terminal may configure the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the K1 set according to the communication protocol or RRC parameters. In this way, the terminal can directly learn the K1 set associated with the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship.
终端从这多个K1 set中确定该第一信息对应的K1 set的一种实现方式中,终端可以先确定第一信息对应的配置分组标识,并根据该配置分组标识与K1 set的关联关系确定第一信息对应的K1 set。In an implementation manner in which the terminal determines the K1 set corresponding to the first information from the multiple K1 sets, the terminal may first determine the configuration group ID corresponding to the first information, and determine according to the association relationship between the configuration group ID and the K1 set K1 set corresponding to the first information.
本申请的通信方法中,若不同的配置分组标识对应不同的网络设备,则说明不同的K1 set对应不同的网络设备。也就是说,终端向不同的网络设备发送HARQ反馈信息时,所使用的K1 set可以不同。In the communication method of this application, if different configuration group identifiers correspond to different network devices, it means that different K1 sets correspond to different network devices. In other words, when the terminal sends HARQ feedback information to different network devices, the K1 set used may be different.
不同的待反馈时隙对应不同的时隙偏移值集合,可以使得不同的待反馈时隙上的反馈比特可以不同,从而可以节省信令开销。这是因为K1 set的大小从一定程度上是影响了HARQ-ACK码本的大小,所以不同的网络设备根据自己的业务量来配置合适的K1 set,就可以控制反馈信令的开销。例如,如果网络的业务量很小,网络设备可以控制某些下行slot上不发送业务数据,则K1 set在设置的时候就可以不包含该下行slot,从而可以减少信令开销。Different time slots to be fed back correspond to different time slot offset value sets, so that the feedback bits on different time slots to be fed back can be different, thereby saving signaling overhead. This is because the size of the K1 set affects the size of the HARQ-ACK codebook to a certain extent, so different network devices can configure an appropriate K1 set according to their own traffic to control the overhead of feedback signaling. For example, if the traffic volume of the network is very small and the network equipment can control certain downlink slots not to send service data, the K1 set may not include the downlink slot when it is set, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
上面介绍了HARQ反馈码本为半静态码本情况下,终端在配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送HARQ反馈信息的实现方式。下面介绍HARQ反馈码本为动态码本情况下,终端在配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送HARQ反馈信息的实现方式。The foregoing describes the implementation manner in which the terminal sends HARQ feedback information in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier when the HARQ feedback codebook is a semi-static codebook. The following describes an implementation manner in which the terminal sends HARQ feedback information in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier when the HARQ feedback codebook is a dynamic codebook.
HARQ反馈码本为动态码本且终端上仅配置一个K1 set的情况下,在一种可能的实现方式中,终端接收第一信息(第一信息的含义如前所述),并根据第一信息确定下行数据 传输的目标反馈时隙,之后,可以先判断该目标反馈时隙与该下行数据传输对应的配置分组标识之间是否存在关联关系。若存在,则在该目标反馈时隙发送该下行数据传输的实际HARQ反馈信息,例如HARQ-ACK;否则在该目标反馈时隙不发送该下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。In the case that the HARQ feedback codebook is a dynamic codebook and only one K1 set is configured on the terminal, in a possible implementation manner, the terminal receives the first information (the meaning of the first information is as described above), and according to the first The information determines the target feedback time slot for downlink data transmission, and then, it can be first determined whether there is an association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier corresponding to the downlink data transmission. If so, the actual HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission, such as HARQ-ACK, is sent in the target feedback time slot; otherwise, the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is not sent in the target feedback time slot.
HARQ反馈码本为动态码本且终端上仅配置一个K1 set的情况下,在另一种可能的实现方式中,终端根据第一信息确定下行数据传输对应的K1后,根据该K1确定的目标反馈时隙与该下行数据传输对应的配置分组标识之间存在关联关系。此时,终端可以直接在该目标反馈时隙发送该下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,而不需要判断该目标反馈时隙是否是该下行数据传输对应的配置分组标识所关联的时隙。When the HARQ feedback codebook is a dynamic codebook and only one K1 set is configured on the terminal, in another possible implementation manner, after the terminal determines the K1 corresponding to the downlink data transmission according to the first information, the target determined according to the K1 There is an association relationship between the feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier corresponding to the downlink data transmission. At this time, the terminal can directly send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot, without determining whether the target feedback time slot is the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier corresponding to the downlink data transmission.
HARQ反馈码本为动态码本且终端上配置有多个K1 set的情况下,终端需要先从这多个K1 set中确定目标K1 set,才根据第一信息从该目标K1 set中确定所需K1。从这多个K1 set中确定目标K1 set的方式可以参考前面的相关内容,此处不再赘述。When the HARQ feedback codebook is a dynamic codebook and multiple K1 sets are configured on the terminal, the terminal needs to determine the target K1 set from the multiple K1 sets first, and then determine the required K1 set from the target K1 set according to the first information K1. The method of determining the target K1 set from these multiple K1 sets can refer to the previous related content, which will not be repeated here.
本申请的实施例中,在一些可能的实现方式中,时隙(包括前述的待反馈时隙和目标反馈时隙)与配置分组标识之间的关联关系可以由网络设备通过信令给终端配置。网络设备可以在时隙的时隙配比配置或时隙格式配置中添加一个参数,该参数为该时隙关联的配置分组标识,例如为CORESET group id、CORESET id或PUCCH resource indicator。这样,后续流程中,终端可以从时隙配比配置或时隙格式配置中获知该时隙关联的配置分组标识。应理解,当该时隙中的符号全为下行符号时,该参数可视为无效,或者不配置参数。In the embodiments of the present application, in some possible implementations, the association relationship between the time slot (including the aforementioned time slot to be fed back and the target feedback time slot) and the configuration group identifier can be configured by the network device to the terminal through signaling . The network device can add a parameter to the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration of the time slot. The parameter is the configuration group identifier associated with the time slot, for example, CORESET group id, CORESET id, or PUCCH resource indicator. In this way, in the subsequent process, the terminal can learn the configuration group identifier associated with the time slot from the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration. It should be understood that when the symbols in the time slot are all downlink symbols, the parameter can be regarded as invalid, or the parameter is not configured.
当然,也可以由协议规定好时隙(包括前述的待反馈时隙和目标反馈时隙)与配置分组标识之间的关联关系,终端根据协议配置时隙与配置分组标识之间的关联关系。例如,终端上可以根据协议配置有时隙号与配置分组的关联关系。Of course, the association relationship between the time slot (including the aforementioned time slot to be fed back and the target feedback time slot) and the configuration group identifier can also be specified by the protocol, and the terminal configures the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier according to the protocol. For example, the terminal may be configured with the association relationship between the time slot number and the configuration group according to the protocol.
例如,协议中规定时隙号为偶数的时隙关联配置分组标识1,时隙号为奇数的时隙关联配置分组标识2时,终端可以根据该协议确定时隙与配置分组标识之间的关联关系。For example, when the protocol specifies that the time slot with an even number of time slots is associated with configuration group ID 1, and the time slot with an odd number of time slots is associated with configuration group ID 2, the terminal can determine the association between the time slot and the configuration group ID according to the protocol relationship.
又如,协议中固定偶数号时隙关联偶数值的配置分组标识,奇数号时隙关联奇数值的配置分组标识。终端可以根据该协议确定时隙与配置分组标识之间的关联关系。For another example, in the protocol, a fixed even-numbered time slot is associated with an even-valued configuration group ID, and an odd-numbered time slot is associated with an odd-valued configuration group ID. The terminal can determine the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier according to the protocol.
又如,协议中规定每帧中的各个包含上行符号的时隙按照时隙号从小到大排序,间隔的关联不同的配置分组标识,其中配置分组标识也是按照标识的值大小从小到大排序。For another example, the protocol stipulates that the time slots containing the uplink symbols in each frame are sorted according to the slot number from small to large, and the interval is associated with different configuration group identifiers. The configuration group identifiers are also sorted according to the value of the identifier from small to large.
例如,如图9所示,每个子帧中包含上行符号的时隙为时隙3、5、7和8,即每帧中可以用于发送HARQ反馈信息的时隙为时隙3、5、7和8。以与终端通信的网络设备包括传输参考点(transmission reference point,TRP)1和TRP 2为例,可以将时隙3、5、7和8配置给TRP 1和TRP 2。具体地,网络设备可以在时隙号为3和7的时隙的配比配置或格式配置中添加相同的配置分组标识,例如与TRP 1对应的配置分组标识,在时隙号为5和8的时隙的配比配置或格式配置中添加相同的配置分组标识,例如与TRP 2对应的配置分组标识。其中,TRP 1对应的配置分组标识可以是TRP 1向终端发送DCI时,所使用的时频资源对应的CORESET group id、CORESET id,或可以是该DCI中的PUCCH resource indicator所指示的值,或者可以是该DCI调度的PDSCH的config,或者可以是该DCI对应的PDCCH config等等;TRP 2对应的配置分组标识可以是TRP 2向终端发送DCI时,所使用的时频资源对应的CORESET group id、CORESET id,或可以是该DCI中的PUCCH resource indicator所指示的值,或者可以是该DCI调度的PDSCH的config,或者可以是该 DCI对应的PDCCH config等等。For example, as shown in Figure 9, the time slots containing uplink symbols in each subframe are time slots 3, 5, 7, and 8, that is, the time slots that can be used to send HARQ feedback information in each frame are time slots 3, 5, and 5, respectively. 7 and 8. Taking the network equipment communicating with the terminal including the transmission reference point (TRP) 1 and TRP 2 as an example, time slots 3, 5, 7, and 8 can be configured for TRP 1 and TRP 2. Specifically, the network device can add the same configuration group identifier to the configuration or format configuration of the time slots with time slot numbers 3 and 7, for example, the configuration group identifier corresponding to TRP 1, when the time slot numbers are 5 and 8. The same configuration group identifier, for example, the configuration group identifier corresponding to TRP 2, is added to the configuration or format configuration of the time slot. Wherein, the configuration group identifier corresponding to TRP 1 may be the CORESET group id and CORESET id corresponding to the time-frequency resource used when TRP 1 sends DCI to the terminal, or may be the value indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI, or It can be the config of the PDSCH scheduled by the DCI, or it can be the PDCCH config corresponding to the DCI, etc.; the configuration group identifier corresponding to TRP 2 can be the CORESET group id corresponding to the time-frequency resource used when TRP 2 sends DCI to the terminal , CORESET id, or may be the value indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI, or may be the config of the PDSCH scheduled by the DCI, or may be the PDCCH config corresponding to the DCI, etc.
本申请的实施例中,在一些可能的实现方式中,可以由网络设备通过信令给终端配置时隙(包括前述的待反馈时隙和目标反馈时隙)与K1 set的关联关系。例如,网络设备可以在该时隙的时隙配比配置或时隙格式配置中添加一个参数,该参数为该时隙关联的K1set的标识,例如为该时隙关联的K1 set的索引。这样,后续流程中,终端可以从时隙配比配置或时隙格式配置中获知该时隙关联的K1 set。应理解,当该时隙中的符号全为下行符号时,该参数可视为无效,或者不配置参数。In the embodiments of the present application, in some possible implementation manners, the network device may configure the association relationship between the time slot (including the aforementioned time slot to be fed back and the target feedback time slot) and the K1 set for the terminal through signaling. For example, the network device may add a parameter to the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration of the time slot. The parameter is the identifier of the K1 set associated with the time slot, for example, the index of the K1 set associated with the time slot. In this way, in the subsequent process, the terminal can learn the K1 set associated with the time slot from the time slot configuration or the time slot format configuration. It should be understood that when the symbols in the time slot are all downlink symbols, the parameter can be regarded as invalid, or the parameter is not configured.
由网络设备配置时隙与K1 set之间的关联关系,使得不同的TRP对应不同的K1 set时,网络侧设备可以根据网络的负载情况调整向不同的网络设备反馈HARQ信息所用的资源。The network device configures the association between the time slot and the K1 set, so that when different TRPs correspond to different K1 sets, the network side device can adjust the resources used to feed back HARQ information to different network devices according to the network load.
当然,也可以由协议规定好时隙(包括前述的待反馈时隙和目标反馈时隙)与K1 set之间的关联关系,终端根据该协议确定时隙与K1 set之间的关联关系。Of course, the association relationship between the time slot (including the aforementioned time slot to be fed back and the target feedback time slot) and the K1 set can also be specified by the agreement, and the terminal determines the association relationship between the time slot and the K1 set according to the protocol.
例如,协议中可以规定在偶数号时隙关联索引值为偶数的K1 set,奇数号时隙关联索引值为奇数值的K1 set。假设终端上配置了两个K1 set,其中一个K1 set为K1 set-1,且K1 set-1的索引为0,另一个K1 set为K1 set-2,且K1 set-2的索引为1,则终端根据该协议可以确定偶数号时隙与K1 set-1关联以及奇数号时隙与K1 set-2关联。For example, the protocol may specify that the even-numbered time slot associated index value is an even number K1 set, and the odd-numbered time slot associated index value is an odd value K1 set. Assuming that two K1 sets are configured on the terminal, one K1 set is K1 set-1, and the index of K1 set-1 is 0, and the other K1 set is K1 set-2, and the index of K1 set-2 is 1. Then the terminal can determine that the even-numbered time slot is associated with K1 set-1 and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with K1 set-2 according to the protocol.
以图10为例,上行时隙包含3、5、7和8。假设终端上配置了两个K1 set,其中一个K1 set为K1 set-1,且K1 set-1的索引为0,另一个K1 set为K1 set-2,且K1 set-2的索引为1,则终端根据上述协议可以确定时隙8与K1 set-1关联,时隙3、时隙5和时隙7与K1 set-2关联。Taking Figure 10 as an example, the uplink time slots include 3, 5, 7, and 8. Assuming that two K1 sets are configured on the terminal, one K1 set is K1 set-1, and the index of K1 set-1 is 0, and the other K1 set is K1 set-2, and the index of K1 set-2 is 1. Then the terminal can determine that time slot 8 is associated with K1 set-1, and time slot 3, time slot 5, and time slot 7 are associated with K1 set-2 according to the foregoing protocol.
又如,可以在协议中规定偶数号时隙总是关联索引较小的K1 set,奇数号时隙总是关联索引较大的K1 set。这样,终端可以根据该协议确定时隙与K1 set之间的关联关系。For another example, it can be specified in the protocol that even-numbered time slots are always associated with the K1 set with a smaller index, and odd-numbered time slots are always associated with the K1 set with a larger index. In this way, the terminal can determine the association relationship between the time slot and the K1 set according to the protocol.
本申请的实施例中,当存在多个K1 set时,在一些可能的实现方式中,可以由网络设备通过信令配置时隙与配置分组标识的关联关系以及配置分组标识与K1 set的关联关系。这样,终端可以根据这两种关联关系确定时隙与K1 set的关联关系。其中,时隙与配置分组标识的关联关系的配置方式可以参考前述内容;配置分组标识与K1 set的关联关系的配置方式可以参考前述时隙与K1 set的关联关系的配置方式,只需将时隙与K1 set的关联关系的配置方式中的时隙替换为配置分组标识即可。In the embodiment of this application, when there are multiple K1 sets, in some possible implementations, the network device can configure the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the K1 set through signaling. . In this way, the terminal can determine the association relationship between the time slot and the K1 set according to the two association relationships. Among them, the configuration method of the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier can refer to the foregoing content; the configuration method of the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the K1 set can refer to the configuration method of the association relationship between the time slot and the K1 set. The time slot in the configuration mode of the association relationship between the slot and the K1 set can be replaced with the configuration group identifier.
下面进一步详细介绍本申请实施例的通信方法。配置分组标识可以为DCI中所指的PUCCH resource indicator标识、PDCCH-Config标识、CORESET标识、CORESET group标识或者CORESET内部的一个higher layer index的情况类似。The communication method of the embodiment of the present application will be described in further detail below. The configuration group identifier may be the PUCCH resource indicator identifier, the PDCCH-Config identifier, the CORESET identifier, the CORESET group identifier, or a higher layer index within the CORESET as referred to in the DCI. The situation is similar.
其中,CORESET group标识可以是CORESET group id;也可以是给CORESET group分配的索引,例如,有两个CORESET group,则其中一个CORESET group的标识可以是0,另一个CORESET group的标识可以是1。Among them, the CORESET group ID can be the CORESET group id; it can also be an index assigned to the CORESET group. For example, if there are two CORESET groups, the ID of one CORESET group can be 0, and the ID of the other CORESET group can be 1.
其中,PUCCH resource indicator标识可以是PUCCH resource indicator的值;也可以是:将PUCCH resource indicator的所有取值划分为不同的范围,不同的范围分配不同的索引,PUCCH resource indicator取值所属的范围的索引可作为PUCCH resource indicator标识。Among them, the PUCCH resource indicator can be the value of the PUCCH resource indicator; it can also be: all values of the PUCCH resource indicator are divided into different ranges, and different ranges are assigned different indexes, and the index of the range to which the value of the PUCCH resource indicator belongs It can be used as PUCCH resource indicator.
其中,PDCCH-Config标识可以是PDCCH-Config id;也可以是给PDCCH-Config分 配的索引,例如,有两种PDCCH-Config,则其中一个PDCCH-Config的标识可以是0,另一个PDCCH-Config的标识可以是1。Among them, the PDCCH-Config identifier can be PDCCH-Config id; it can also be an index allocated to PDCCH-Config. For example, there are two types of PDCCH-Config, and the identifier of one PDCCH-Config can be 0, and the other PDCCH-Config. The identifier can be 1.
其中,CORESET标识可以是CORESET id;也可以是给CORESET分配的索引,例如,有两个CORESET,则其中一个CORESET的标识可以是0,另一个CORESET的标识可以是1。Among them, the CORESET identifier can be CORESET id; it can also be an index assigned to CORESET. For example, if there are two CORESETs, one of the CORESET identifiers can be 0, and the other CORESET identifier can be 1.
第一个示例:The first example:
协议中预先规定时隙与配置分组标识的关联关系,其中,协议规定偶数号时隙与配置分组标识1关联,奇数号时隙与配置分组标识2关联。可选的,偶数号时隙与偶数值的配置分组标识关联,奇数号时隙与奇数值的配置分组标识关联。可选的,偶数号时隙与值较小的配置分组标识关联,奇数号时隙与值较大的配置分组标识关联。The protocol pre-prescribes the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier, where the protocol specifies that the even-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group identifier 2. Optionally, the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered configuration group identifier, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd-numbered configuration group identifier. Optionally, the even-numbered time slot is associated with a configuration group identifier with a smaller value, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with a configuration group identifier with a larger value.
以协议规定偶数号时隙与偶数值的配置分组标识关联,且奇数号时隙与奇数值的配置分组标识关联为例,假设配置分组标识1为0,配置分组标识2为1时,则终端根据该协议可知偶数号时隙与配置分组标识1关联,奇数号时隙与配置分组标识2关联。此外,终端上配置一个K1 set={2,4}。Taking the protocol stipulating that the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered configuration group identifier, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd-numbered configuration group identifier as an example, assuming that the configuration group identifier 1 is 0 and the configuration group identifier 2 is 1, the terminal According to the protocol, it can be known that the even-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group ID 1, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group ID 2. In addition, a K1 set={2, 4} is configured on the terminal.
终端接收DCI,该DCI调度PDSCH(记为PDSCH 1),假设PDSCH 1在时隙号为2的下行时隙上传输,且该DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0。此外,假设该DCI对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1。The terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). It is assumed that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI is configuration group identifier 1.
(1)HARQ-ACK码本为静态码本(1) HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
假设终端根据K1 set确定时隙号为4的待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机。其中,该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH的接收时机包含在两个时隙中,即时隙号0和时隙号2。例如,该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机包括两个PDSCH接收时机,则一个接收时机(即为接收时机1)位于时隙号为0的下行时隙,另一个接收时机(即为接收时机2)位于时隙号为2的下行时隙。Assume that the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number of 4 according to the K1 set. Wherein, the receiving timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back is contained in two time slots, namely, time slot number 0 and time slot number 2. For example, if the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH reception timings, one reception timing (i.e., reception timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with time slot number 0, and the other reception timing (i.e., reception timing) 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
终端在时隙号为2的下行时隙接收到PDSCH1,并确定调度该PDSCH1的DCI所对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1。因为该待反馈时隙与配置分组标识1关联,则可以在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)发送该PDSCH1的HARQ-ACK信息。The terminal receives PDSCH1 in a downlink time slot with a time slot number of 2, and determines that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI that schedules the PDSCH1 is configuration group identifier 1. Because the time slot to be fed back is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH1 can be sent in the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4).
假设时隙号为6的上行时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机包括接收时机3和接收时机2,该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)对应的PDSCH接收时机包括接收时机1和接收时机2,且该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)和时隙号为6的上行时隙是关联到同一个配置分组标识上的,此时接收时机2同时在该反馈时隙时隙(时隙号为3)和时隙号为6的上行时隙对应的接收时机集合内,则终端还需根据DCI中的第一信息确定PDSCH1的目标反馈时隙。由DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0可知第一信息指示的K1为2,且PDSCH1所在的时隙的时隙号为2(假设上下行子载波间隔相同),因此目标反馈时隙的标号为4。由于该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)与该目标反馈时隙为同一个时隙,因此终端应在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)上发送PDSCH 1的实际HARQ-ACK信息,而在时隙号为6的上行时隙反馈NACK作为PDSCH1的HARQ反馈信息。Assuming that the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 6 includes receiving timing 3 and receiving timing 2, the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) includes receiving timing 1 and receiving timing 2. And the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) and the uplink time slot with time slot number 6 are associated with the same configuration group identifier. At this time, receiving opportunity 2 is in the feedback time slot (time slot). In the receiving opportunity set corresponding to the uplink time slot number 3) and the time slot number 6, the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to the first information in the DCI. The time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, it can be known that the K1 indicated by the first information is 2, and the time slot number of the time slot in which PDSCH1 is located is 2 (assuming the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are the same), so The number of the target feedback slot is 4. Since the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) and the target feedback time slot are the same time slot, the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK of PDSCH 1 on the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) Information, and NACK is fed back in the uplink slot with slot number 6 as the HARQ feedback information for PDSCH1.
(2)HARQ-ACK码本为动态码本(2) HARQ-ACK codebook is dynamic codebook
假设上下行子载波间隔相同,终端根据第一信息和K1 set确定PDSCH1的HARQ-ACK信息的目标反馈时隙的时隙号为4,即时隙号为4的上行时隙为PDSCH1的HARQ-ACK 信息的目标反馈时隙。Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are the same, the terminal determines according to the first information and K1 set that the target feedback slot number of the HARQ-ACK information of PDSCH1 is 4, that is, the uplink slot with slot number 4 is the HARQ-ACK of PDSCH1 Information target feedback slot.
因为该目标反馈时隙与配置分组标识1关联,所以终端在该目标反馈时隙发送该PDSCH1的HARQ-ACK信息。Because the target feedback slot is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, the terminal sends the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH1 in the target feedback slot.
第二个示例:Second example:
协议中预先规定时隙与配置分组标识的关联关系,其中,协议规定偶数号时隙与配置分组标识1的关联,奇数号时隙与配置分组标识2的关联。可选的,偶数号时隙与偶数值的配置分组标识关联,奇数号时隙与奇数值的配置分组标识关联。可选的,偶数号时隙与值较小的配置分组标识关联,奇数号时隙与值较大的配置分组标识关联。The protocol pre-prescribes the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group ID, where the protocol specifies the association between the even number time slot and the configuration group ID 1, and the odd number time slot and the configuration group ID 2 are associated. Optionally, the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered configuration group identifier, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd-numbered configuration group identifier. Optionally, the even-numbered time slot is associated with a configuration group identifier with a smaller value, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with a configuration group identifier with a larger value.
协议中还预先规定偶数号时隙与K1 set的关联关系,其中,协议规定奇数号时隙与K1 set索引1关联,偶数号时隙与K1 set索引2关联。可选的,偶数号时隙与偶数值的K1 set索引关联,奇数号时隙与奇数值的K1 set索引关联。可选的,偶数号时隙与K1 set索引值较小的关联,奇数号时隙与K1 set索引值较大的关联。The protocol also pre-prescribes the association relationship between even-numbered time slots and K1 set. The protocol specifies that odd-numbered time slots are associated with K1 set index 1, and even-numbered time slots are associated with K1 set index 2. Optionally, the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered K1 set index, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd-numbered K1 set index. Optionally, the even-numbered time slot is associated with a smaller K1 set index value, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with a larger K1 set index value.
以协议规定偶数号时隙与偶数值的配置分组标识关联,且奇数号时隙与奇数值的配置分组标识关联,偶数号时隙与偶数值的K1 set索引关联,奇数号时隙与奇数值的K1 set索引关联为例,假设终端上配置两个K1 set,分别记为K1 set-1和K1 set-2,且K1 set-1={2,4},配置分组标识1为0,配置分组标识2为1,K1 set-1的索引为0,K1 set-2的索引为1时,终端根据该协议可知偶数号时隙与配置分组标识1关联,奇数号时隙与配置分组标识2关联,偶数号时隙与K1 set-1关联,奇数号时隙与K1 set-2关联。According to the agreement, the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered configuration group identifier, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd-numbered configuration group identifier, the even-numbered time slot is associated with the even-numbered K1 set index, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the odd value. As an example, assume that two K1 sets are configured on the terminal, denoted as K1 set-1 and K1 set-2, and K1 set-1 = {2, 4}, and the configuration group ID 1 is 0, When the group ID 2 is 1, the index of K1 set-1 is 0, and the index of K1 set-2 is 1, the terminal knows that the even-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group ID 1, and the odd-numbered time slot is associated with the configuration group ID 2. Associated, even-numbered time slots are associated with K1 set-1, and odd-numbered time slots are associated with K1 set-2.
终端接收DCI,该DCI调度PDSCH(记为PDSCH 1)。假设PDSCH 1在时隙号为2的下行时隙上传输,且该DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0。此外,假设该DCI对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1。The terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). Assume that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI is configuration group identifier 1.
(1)HARQ-ACK码本为静态码本(1) HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
假设终端确定时隙号为4的待反馈时隙的接收时机。其中,终端可以根据该待反馈时隙与K1 set-1={2,4}的关联关系,确定该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机。例如,该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH的接收时机包括两个PDSCH接收时机,一个接收时机(即为接收时机1)位于时隙号为0的下行时隙,另一个接收时机(即为接收时机2)位于时隙号为2的下行时隙。Assume that the terminal determines the receiving timing of the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number of 4. The terminal may determine the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and K1 set-1={2, 4}. For example, the reception timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH reception timings, one reception timing (i.e. reception timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with time slot number 0, and the other reception timing (i.e. reception timing 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
终端在时隙号为2的下行时隙接收到PDSCH 1,并确定调度PDSCH 1的DCI所对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1。因为该待反馈时隙关联配置分组标识1,所以可以在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)发送该PDSCH1的HARQ-ACK信息。The terminal receives the PDSCH 1 in the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and determines that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI for scheduling the PDSCH 1 is the configuration group identifier 1. Because the time slot to be fed back is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 can be sent in the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4).
假设时隙号为6的上行时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机包括接收时机3和接收时机2,该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)对应的PDSCH接收时机包括接收时机1和接收时机2,且该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)和时隙号为6的上行时隙是关联到同一个配置分组标识上的,此时接收时机2同时在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)和时隙号为6的上行时隙对应的接收时机集合内,则终端还需根据DCI中的第一信息确定PDSCH1的目标反馈时隙。由配置分组标识1与K1 set-1均与时隙号为4的上行时隙具有关联关系可知,DCI中的第一信息指示的索引为K1 set-1中的K1。Assuming that the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 6 includes receiving timing 3 and receiving timing 2, the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) includes receiving timing 1 and receiving timing 2. And the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) and the uplink time slot with time slot number 6 are associated with the same configuration group identifier. At this time, the receiving time 2 is in the time slot to be fed back (time slot number). 4) In the receiving opportunity set corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 6, the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to the first information in the DCI. It can be seen that the configuration group identifier 1 and K1 set-1 are associated with the uplink time slot with the time slot number of 4, and it can be seen that the index indicated by the first information in the DCI is K1 in K1 set-1.
假设上下行子载波间隔相等,则由DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0,K1set-1中索引为0的K1为2,且PDSCH1所在的时隙的时隙号为2可知,目标反馈时隙的 时隙号为4。因为该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)与该目标反馈时隙为同一个时隙,因此终端应在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)上发送PDSCH 1的实际HARQ-ACK信息,而在时隙号为6的上行时隙反馈NACK作为PDSCH1的HARQ反馈信息。Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are equal, the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, K1 with index 0 in K1set-1 is 2, and the time slot number of the time slot in which PDSCH1 is located is 2 It can be seen that the slot number of the target feedback slot is 4. Because the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) and the target feedback time slot are the same time slot, the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK of PDSCH 1 on the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) Information, and NACK is fed back in the uplink slot with slot number 6 as the HARQ feedback information for PDSCH1.
(2)HARQ-ACK码本为动态码本(2) HARQ-ACK codebook is dynamic codebook
由于配置分组标识1与偶数号时隙关联,且偶数号时隙与K1 set-1关联,因此终端应根据K1 set-1和第一信息确定PDSCH1的目标反馈时隙。Since the configuration group ID 1 is associated with an even-numbered time slot, and the even-numbered time slot is associated with K1 set-1, the terminal should determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to K1 set-1 and the first information.
假设上下行子载波间隔相同,由DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0,K1set-1中索引为0的K1为2,且PDSCH1所在的时隙的时隙号为2可知,终端应在时隙号为4的目标反馈时隙上发送PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息,即PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息的目标反馈时隙的时隙号为4。Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are the same, the slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, K1 with index 0 in K1set-1 is 2, and the slot number of the time slot in which PDSCH1 is located is 2. It can be seen that the terminal should send the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 in the target feedback slot with the slot number of 4, that is, the slot number of the target feedback slot of the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 is 4.
第三个示例:The third example:
协议中规定:将每帧中包含上行符号的时隙按照时隙号从小到大的顺序排序,并将排序后的时隙交替地关联不同的配置分组标识,其中配置分组标识也是按照标识的值从小到大排序,时隙号最小的时隙关联值最小的配置分组标识。The protocol stipulates that the time slots containing uplink symbols in each frame are sorted in ascending order of time slot number, and the sorted time slots are alternately associated with different configuration group IDs, where the configuration group ID is also based on the value of the ID Sort from small to large, and configure the group ID with the smallest time slot associated value.
例如,上行时隙包含时隙3、4、5和7,并从小到大排序,配置分组标识1为“0”和配置分组标识2为“1”,则根据协议的规定,时隙3关联到配置分组标识1,时隙4关联到配置分组标识2,时隙5关联到配置分组标识1,时隙7关联到配置分组标识2。此外,假设K1 set={1,3}。For example, the uplink time slot contains time slots 3, 4, 5 and 7, and they are sorted from small to large. If the configuration group ID 1 is "0" and the configuration group ID 2 is "1", then time slot 3 is associated according to the protocol. To configuration group identification 1, time slot 4 is associated with configuration group identification 2, time slot 5 is associated with configuration group identification 1, and time slot 7 is associated with configuration group identification 2. In addition, suppose K1 set={1, 3}.
终端接收DCI,该DCI调度PDSCH(记为PDSCH 1),假设PDSCH 1在时隙号为2的下行时隙上传输,且该DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0。此外,假设该DCI对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1。The terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). It is assumed that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI is configuration group identifier 1.
(1)HARQ-ACK码本为静态码本(1) HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
假设终端根据K1 set确定时隙号为3的待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机。假设该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH的接收时机包含在两个时隙中。例如,该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机包括两个PDSCH接收时机,则一个接收时机(即为接收时机1)位于时隙号为0的下行时隙,另一个接收时机(即为接收时机2)位于时隙号为2的下行时隙。Assume that the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number of 3 according to the K1 set. It is assumed that the receiving timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back is contained in two time slots. For example, if the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH reception timings, one reception timing (i.e., reception timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with time slot number 0, and the other reception timing (i.e., reception timing) 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
终端在时隙号为2的下行时隙接收到PDSCH1。由调度该PDSCH1的DCI所对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1,且该待反馈时隙与配置分组标识1关联可知,可以在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为3)发送该PDSCH1的HARQ-ACK信息。The terminal receives PDSCH1 in the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2. From the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI scheduling the PDSCH1 as the configuration group identifier 1, and the time slot to be fed back is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, it can be seen that the PDSCH1 can be sent in the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3) HARQ-ACK information.
假设时隙号为5的上行时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机包括接收时机3,且接收时机3与接收时机2重叠,则终端还需根据DCI中的第一信息确定PDSCH1的目标反馈时隙。Assuming that the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 5 includes receiving timing 3, and receiving timing 3 overlaps with receiving timing 2, the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to the first information in the DCI.
假设上下行子载波间隔相同,由DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0可知第一信息指示的K1为1,且PDSCH1所在的时隙的时隙号为2,因此目标反馈时隙的时隙号为3。由于该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)与该目标反馈时隙为同一个时隙,因此终端应在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为4)上发送PDSCH 1的实际HARQ-ACK信息,而在时隙号为5的上行时隙反馈NACK作为PDSCH1的HARQ反馈信息。Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are the same, the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, it can be seen that K1 indicated by the first information is 1, and the time slot number of the time slot where PDSCH1 is located is 2, so the target The slot number of the feedback slot is 3. Since the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) and the target feedback time slot are the same time slot, the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK of PDSCH 1 on the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 4) Information, and NACK is fed back in the uplink slot with slot number 5 as the HARQ feedback information of PDSCH1.
(2)HARQ-ACK码本为动态码本(2) HARQ-ACK codebook is dynamic codebook
假设上下行子载波间隔相同,终端根据第一信息和K1 set确定PDSCH1的HARQ-ACK信息的目标反馈时隙的时隙号为3,即时隙号为3的上行时隙为PDSCH1的HARQ-ACK 信息的目标反馈时隙。Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are the same, the terminal determines according to the first information and K1 set that the target feedback slot number of the HARQ-ACK information of PDSCH1 is 3, that is, the uplink slot with slot number 3 is the HARQ-ACK of PDSCH1 Information target feedback slot.
因为时隙号为3的目标反馈时隙与配置分组标识1关联,所以终端在该目标反馈时隙发送该PDSCH1的HARQ-ACK信息。Because the target feedback slot with the slot number of 3 is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, the terminal sends the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH1 in the target feedback slot.
第四个示例:Fourth example:
协议中规定:将每帧中包含上行符号的时隙按照时隙号从小到大的顺序排序,将配置分组标识按照标识的值从小到大的顺序排序,将K1 set按照K1 set索引从小到大的顺序排序,且排序后的时隙交替地关联不同的配置分组标识和不同的K1 set,其中,时隙号最小的时隙关联值最小的配置分组标识,时隙号最小的时隙与索引小的K1 set关联。The protocol stipulates that the time slots containing the uplink symbols in each frame are sorted in ascending order of the slot number, the configuration group identifiers are sorted according to the value of the identifiers in ascending order, and the K1 set is sorted according to the K1 set index in ascending order The sorted time slots are alternately associated with different configuration group IDs and different K1 sets. Among them, the configuration group ID with the smallest slot associated value is the smallest slot number, and the slot with the smallest slot number has the index Small K1 set association.
例如,上行时隙包含时隙3、4、5和7,并从小到大排序;配置分组标识1为“0”,配置分组标识2为“1”,K1 set包括K1 set-1和K1 set-2,K1 set-1的索引为0,K1 set-2的索引为1,则终端根据协议可知,时隙3关联到配置分组标识1,时隙4关联到配置分组标识2,时隙5关联到配置分组标识1,时隙7关联到配置分组标识2,时隙3关联K1 set-1,时隙4关联K1 set-2,时隙5关联K1 set-1,时隙7关联K1 set-2。其中,假设K1 set-1={1,3}。For example, the uplink time slot includes time slots 3, 4, 5, and 7, and they are sorted from smallest to largest; the configuration group ID 1 is "0", the configuration group ID 2 is "1", K1 set includes K1 set-1 and K1 set -2, the index of K1 set-1 is 0, the index of K1 set-2 is 1, and the terminal knows according to the protocol that time slot 3 is associated with configuration group identification 1, time slot 4 is associated with configuration group identification 2, and time slot 5 Associated with configuration group ID 1, time slot 7 is associated with configuration group ID 2, time slot 3 is associated with K1 set-1, time slot 4 is associated with K1 set-2, time slot 5 is associated with K1 set-1, and time slot 7 is associated with K1 set -2. Among them, suppose K1 set-1={1, 3}.
终端接收DCI,该DCI调度PDSCH(记为PDSCH 1)。假设PDSCH 1在时隙号为2的下行时隙上传输,且该DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0。此外,假设该DCI对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1。The terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). Assume that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI is configuration group identifier 1.
(1)HARQ-ACK码本为静态码本(1) HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
假设终端确定时隙号为3的待反馈时隙的PDSCH接收时机。具体地,终端根据时隙号为3的上行时隙与K1 set-1={1,3}的关联关系,确定该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机。假设,该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH的接收时机包括两个PDSCH接收时机,一个接收时机(即为接收时机1)位于时隙号为0的下行时隙,另一个接收时机(即为接收时机2)位于时隙号为2的下行时隙。Assume that the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing of the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number of 3. Specifically, the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship between the uplink time slot with the time slot number of 3 and K1 set-1={1, 3}. Suppose that the receiving timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH receiving timings, one receiving timing (i.e. receiving timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with slot number 0, and the other receiving timing (i.e. receiving timing) 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
终端在时隙号为2的下行时隙接收到PDSCH 1。由调度该PDSCH1的DCI所对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1,且时隙号为3的待反馈时隙与配置分组标识1关联可知,可以在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为3)发送该PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息。The terminal receives PDSCH 1 in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2. From the configuration group ID corresponding to the DCI scheduling the PDSCH1 as configuration group ID 1, and the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number 3 is associated with the configuration group ID 1, it can be seen that the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3 ) Send the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1.
假设时隙号为5的上行时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机包括接收时机3,且接收时机3与接收时机2重叠,则终端还需根据DCI中的第一信息确定PDSCH 1的目标反馈时隙。Assuming that the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 5 includes receiving timing 3, and receiving timing 3 overlaps with receiving timing 2, the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH 1 according to the first information in the DCI.
由时隙号为3的上行时隙与K1 set-1的关联关系可知DCI中的第一信息指示的索引为K1 set-1中的K1。假设上下行子载波间隔相同,由DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0,K1 set-1中索引为0的K1为1,且PDSCH 1所在的时隙的时隙号为2可知,目标反馈时隙的时隙号为3。由于该目标反馈时隙与该待反馈时隙为同一个时隙(时隙号为3),因此终端应在时隙号为3的时隙上发送PDSCH 1的实际HARQ-ACK信息,而在时隙号为5的上行时隙反馈NACK作为PDSCH 1的HARQ反馈信息。From the association relationship between the uplink time slot with the time slot number 3 and K1 set-1, it can be known that the index indicated by the first information in the DCI is K1 in K1 set-1. Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are the same, the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, K1 with index 0 in K1 set-1 is 1, and the time slot number of the time slot where PDSCH 1 is located It is known that the time slot number of the target feedback time slot is 3. Since the target feedback time slot and the time slot to be fed back are the same time slot (the time slot number is 3), the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK information of PDSCH 1 on the time slot with the time slot number 3, and The uplink time slot with the time slot number of 5 feeds back NACK as the HARQ feedback information of PDSCH 1.
(2)HARQ-ACK码本为动态码本(2) HARQ-ACK codebook is dynamic codebook
由配置分组标识1与时隙3和时隙5关联,且时隙3和时隙5与K1 set-1关联可知,终端应根据K1 set-1确定PDSCH1的目标反馈时隙。From the configuration group ID 1 is associated with time slot 3 and time slot 5, and time slot 3 and time slot 5 are associated with K1 set-1, it can be seen that the terminal should determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to K1 set-1.
假设上下行子载波间隔相等,由DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0,K1set-1中索引为0的K1为1,且PDSCH1所在的时隙的时隙号为2可知,终端应在时隙号 为3的时隙上发送PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息,即PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息的目标反馈时隙的时隙号为3。Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are equal, the slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, K1 with index 0 in K1set-1 is 1, and the slot number of the time slot in which PDSCH1 is located is 2. It can be seen that the terminal should send the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 in the time slot with the time slot number 3, that is, the time slot number of the target feedback time slot of the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 is 3.
第五个示例Fifth example
网络设备通过RRC信令给终端配置时隙与配置分组标识的关联关系。例如,时隙3和时隙5的时隙配置或时隙格式配置中可以添加有配置分组标识1的信息,时隙7和时隙8的时隙配置或时隙格式配置中可以添加有配置分组标识2的信息,其中,时隙3、时隙5、时隙7和时隙8均为包含上行符号的时隙。此外,终端上配置一个K1 set={1,3}。The network device configures the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier for the terminal through RRC signaling. For example, the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration of time slot 3 and time slot 5 can be added with the information of configuration group identifier 1, and the time slot configuration of time slot 7 and time slot 8 or the time slot configuration of time slot 8 can be added with configuration The information of the group identifier 2, where time slot 3, time slot 5, time slot 7 and time slot 8 are all time slots containing uplink symbols. In addition, a K1 set={1, 3} is configured on the terminal.
终端接收DCI,该DCI调度PDSCH(记为PDSCH 1),假设PDSCH 1在时隙号为2的下行时隙上传输,且该DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0。此外,假设该DCI对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1。The terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). It is assumed that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group identifier corresponding to the DCI is configuration group identifier 1.
(1)HARQ-ACK码本为静态码本(1) HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
假设终端根据K1 set确定时隙号为3的待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机。假设该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH的接收时机包含在两个时隙中。例如,该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机包括两个PDSCH接收时机,则一个接收时机(即为接收时机1)位于时隙号为0的下行时隙,另一个接收时机(即为接收时机2)位于时隙号为2的下行时隙。Assume that the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number of 3 according to the K1 set. It is assumed that the receiving timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back is contained in two time slots. For example, if the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH reception timings, one reception timing (i.e., reception timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with time slot number 0, and the other reception timing (i.e., reception timing) 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
终端在时隙号为2的下行时隙接收到PDSCH1。由调度该PDSCH1的DCI所对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1,且时隙号为3的上行时隙与配置分组标识1关联可知,可以在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为3)发送该PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息。The terminal receives PDSCH1 in the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2. From the configuration group ID corresponding to the DCI scheduling the PDSCH1 as configuration group ID 1, and the uplink time slot with slot number 3 is associated with configuration group ID 1, it can be seen that the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3) The HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 is sent.
假设时隙号为5的上行时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机包括接收时机3,且接收时机3与接收时机2重叠,则终端还需根据DCI中的第一信息确定PDSCH1的目标反馈时隙。Assuming that the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 5 includes receiving timing 3, and receiving timing 3 overlaps with receiving timing 2, the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to the first information in the DCI.
假设上下行子载波间隔相同,由DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0可知第一信息指示的K1为1,且PDSCH 1所在的时隙的时隙号为2,则目标反馈时隙的时隙号为3。该目标反馈时隙与该待反馈时隙(时隙号为3)为同一个时隙,因此终端应在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为3)上发送PDSCH 1的实际HARQ-ACK信息,而在时隙号为5的上行时隙反馈NACK作为PDSCH 1的HARQ反馈信息。Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are the same, and the slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, it can be seen that K1 indicated by the first information is 1, and the slot number of the time slot in which PDSCH 1 is located is 2, then The slot number of the target feedback slot is 3. The target feedback time slot and the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3) are the same time slot, so the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK information of PDSCH 1 in the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3) , And NACK is fed back in the uplink slot with slot number 5 as the HARQ feedback information of PDSCH 1.
(2)HARQ-ACK码本为动态码本(2) HARQ-ACK codebook is dynamic codebook
假设上下行子载波间隔相同,终端根据第一信息和K1 set确定PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息的目标反馈时隙的时隙号为3,即时隙号为3的上行时隙为PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息的目标反馈时隙。Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are the same, the terminal determines according to the first information and K1 set that the target feedback slot number of the HARQ-ACK information of PDSCH 1 is 3, that is, the uplink slot with slot number 3 is the HARQ of PDSCH 1 -The target feedback slot for ACK information.
因为时隙号为3的上行时隙与配置分组标识1关联,所以终端在该目标反馈时隙发送该PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息。Because the uplink time slot with the time slot number of 3 is associated with the configuration group identifier 1, the terminal sends the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 in the target feedback time slot.
第六个示例:Sixth example:
网络设备通过RRC信令给终端配置时隙与配置分组标识的关联关系。例如,时隙3和时隙5的时隙配置或时隙格式配置中可以添加有配置分组标识1和K1 set-1的信息,时隙7和时隙8的时隙配置或时隙格式配置中可以添加有配置分组标识2和K1 set-2的信息,时隙3、时隙5、时隙7和时隙8为包含上行符号的时隙。此外,终端上配置有K1 set-1和K1 set-2,且假设K1 set-1={1,3}。The network device configures the association relationship between the time slot and the configuration group identifier for the terminal through RRC signaling. For example, the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration of time slot 3 and time slot 5 can be added with the configuration group identifier 1 and K1 set-1 information, and the time slot configuration or time slot format configuration of time slot 7 and time slot 8 Information for configuring group identification 2 and K1 set-2 can be added to it. Time slot 3, time slot 5, time slot 7 and time slot 8 are time slots containing uplink symbols. In addition, K1 set-1 and K1 set-2 are configured on the terminal, and it is assumed that K1 set-1={1, 3}.
终端接收DCI,该DCI调度PDSCH(记为PDSCH 1)。假设PDSCH 1在时隙号为2的下行时隙上传输,且该DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0。此外,假设该 DCI对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1。The terminal receives the DCI, and the DCI schedules the PDSCH (denoted as PDSCH 1). Assume that the PDSCH 1 is transmitted on the downlink time slot with the time slot number 2, and the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0. In addition, assume that the configuration group ID corresponding to the DCI is configuration group ID 1.
(1)HARQ-ACK码本为静态码本(1) HARQ-ACK codebook is static codebook
假设终端确定时隙号为3的待反馈时隙的PDSCH接收时机。具体地,终端根据时隙号为3的上行时隙与K1 set-1={1,3}的关联关系,确定该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机。假设,该待反馈时隙对应的PDSCH的接收时机包括两个PDSCH接收时机,一个接收时机(即为接收时机1)位于时隙号为0的下行时隙,另一个接收时机(即为接收时机2)位于时隙号为2的下行时隙。Assume that the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing of the time slot to be fed back with the time slot number of 3. Specifically, the terminal determines the PDSCH reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship between the uplink time slot with the time slot number of 3 and K1 set-1={1, 3}. Suppose that the receiving timing of the PDSCH corresponding to the time slot to be fed back includes two PDSCH receiving timings, one receiving timing (i.e. receiving timing 1) is located in the downlink time slot with slot number 0, and the other receiving timing (i.e. receiving timing) 2) Located in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2.
终端在时隙号为2的下行时隙接收到PDSCH 1。由调度该PDSCH 1的DCI所对应的配置分组标识为配置分组标识1,且时隙号为3的上行时隙与配置分组标识1关联可知,可以在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为3)发送该PDSCH1的HARQ-ACK信息。The terminal receives PDSCH 1 in the downlink timeslot with timeslot number 2. From the configuration group ID corresponding to the DCI scheduling the PDSCH 1 as configuration group ID 1, and the uplink time slot with slot number 3 is associated with configuration group ID 1, it can be seen that the time slot to be fed back (time slot number is 3 ) Send the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH1.
假设时隙号为5的上行时隙对应的PDSCH接收时机包括接收时机3,且接收时机3与接收时机2重叠,则终端还需根据DCI中的第一信息确定PDSCH 1的目标反馈时隙。Assuming that the PDSCH receiving timing corresponding to the uplink time slot with the time slot number 5 includes receiving timing 3, and receiving timing 3 overlaps with receiving timing 2, the terminal also needs to determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH 1 according to the first information in the DCI.
由时隙号为3的上行时隙与K1 set-1的关联关系可知DCI中的第一信息指示的索引为K1 set-1中的K1。假设上下行子载波间隔相同,由DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0,K1 set-1中索引为0的K1为1,且PDSCH 1所在的时隙的时隙号为2可知,目标反馈时隙的时隙号为3。由于该目标反馈时隙与该待反馈时隙(时隙号为3)为同一个时隙,因此终端应在该待反馈时隙(时隙号为3)上发送PDSCH 1的实际HARQ-ACK信息,而在时隙号为5的上行时隙反馈NACK作为PDSCH 1的HARQ反馈信息。From the association relationship between the uplink time slot with the time slot number 3 and K1 set-1, it can be known that the index indicated by the first information in the DCI is K1 in K1 set-1. Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are the same, the time slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, K1 with index 0 in K1 set-1 is 1, and the time slot number of the time slot where PDSCH 1 is located It is known that the time slot number of the target feedback time slot is 3. Since the target feedback time slot and the time slot to be fed back (slot number 3) are the same time slot, the terminal should send the actual HARQ-ACK of PDSCH 1 on the time slot to be fed back (slot number 3) Information, and NACK is fed back in the uplink slot with slot number 5 as the HARQ feedback information of PDSCH 1.
(2)HARQ-ACK码本为动态码本(2) HARQ-ACK codebook is dynamic codebook
由配置分组标识1与时隙3和5关联,且时隙3和5与K1 set-1关联可知,终端应根据K1 set-1确定PDSCH1的目标反馈时隙。From the configuration group ID 1 is associated with time slots 3 and 5, and time slots 3 and 5 are associated with K1 set-1, it can be seen that the terminal should determine the target feedback time slot of PDSCH1 according to K1 set-1.
假设上下行子载波间隔相等,由DCI中的第一信息指示的时隙偏移值索引为0,K1set-1中索引为0的K1为1,且PDSCH 1所在的时隙的时隙号为2可知,终端应在时隙号为3的时隙上发送PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息,即PDSCH 1的HARQ-ACK信息的目标反馈时隙的时隙号为3。Assuming that the uplink and downlink subcarrier intervals are equal, the slot offset value index indicated by the first information in the DCI is 0, K1 with index 0 in K1set-1 is 1, and the slot number of the time slot in which PDSCH 1 is located is 2 It can be seen that the terminal should send the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 in the time slot with the time slot number 3, that is, the time slot number of the target feedback time slot of the HARQ-ACK information of the PDSCH 1 is 3.
本申请的实施例中,将包含上行符号的时隙按顺序间隔地分配给不同的TRP,例如图10所示的方式,可以使得不同的TRP获得相对比较均衡的上行资源。此外,若是在协议中规定好时隙与K1 set的关系,则不会额外增加信令开销。In the embodiment of the present application, time slots containing uplink symbols are allocated to different TRPs at sequential intervals, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. 10, different TRPs can obtain relatively balanced uplink resources. In addition, if the relationship between the time slot and K1 set is specified in the protocol, no additional signaling overhead will be added.
应理解,本申请实施例中,时隙的时隙号也可以称为时隙的编号或时隙的索引。It should be understood that, in the embodiment of the present application, the time slot number of the time slot may also be referred to as the number of the time slot or the index of the time slot.
图11为本申请一个实施例的通信方法的示例性流程图。应理解,图11示出了该方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请提出的技术方案还可以执行其他操作或者图11中的各个操作的变形。Fig. 11 is an exemplary flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the application. It should be understood that FIG. 11 shows the steps or operations of the method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the technical solution proposed in this application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 11.
S1110,网络设备发送配置分组标识。S1110: The network device sends the configuration group identifier.
该步骤实现与S210中终端接收配置分组标识相对应,具体内容可以参考S210,此处不再赘述。The implementation of this step corresponds to the configuration group identifier received by the terminal in S210. For the specific content, refer to S210, which will not be repeated here.
S1120,网络设备在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,所述下行数据传输与所述配置分组标识对应。S1120: The network device receives HARQ feedback information of downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, where the downlink data transmission corresponds to the configuration group identifier.
该步骤实现与S220中终端发送HARQ反馈信息相对应,具体内容可以参考S220,此处不再赘述。The implementation of this step corresponds to the HARQ feedback information sent by the terminal in S220. For the specific content, refer to S220, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,本申请实施例中的具体的例子只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例,而非限制本申请实施例的范围。It should be understood that the specific examples in the embodiments of the present application are only intended to help those skilled in the art to better understand the embodiments of the present application, rather than limiting the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
还应理解,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should also be understood that the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
还应理解,本申请实施例中,“预先设定”、“预先定义”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。It should also be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, "pre-set" and "pre-defined" can be achieved by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other information that can be used to indicate related information in the device (for example, including terminal devices and network devices). This application does not limit the specific implementation method.
还应理解,在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。It should also be understood that, in the various embodiments of the present application, if there are no special instructions and logical conflicts, the terms and/or descriptions between the different embodiments are consistent and can be mutually cited. The technical features in the different embodiments According to its inherent logical relationship, it can be combined to form a new embodiment.
可以理解的是,本申请上述实施例中,由终端设备实现的方法,也可以由可配置于终端的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现,由路边单元实现的方法,也可以由可配置于路边单元的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现。It is understandable that, in the foregoing embodiments of the present application, the method implemented by the terminal device may also be implemented by a component (such as a chip or circuit) configurable in the terminal, and the method implemented by the roadside unit may also be implemented by the method configurable in the terminal. The components (such as chips or circuits) of the roadside unit are implemented.
以上,结合图1至图11详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下,结合图12至图14详细说明本申请实施例提供的装置。应理解,装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应,因此,未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例,为了简洁,部分内容不再赘述。Above, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application has been described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 11. Hereinafter, the device provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. It should be understood that the description of the device embodiment and the description of the method embodiment correspond to each other. Therefore, for the content not described in detail, please refer to the above method embodiment. For brevity, part of the content will not be repeated.
图12示出了本申请一个实施例的通信装置1200的结构示意图。应理解,该通信装置1200可以实现图2的实施例中的终端设备所具备的任意功能。该通信装置可以是终端,也可以是可配置于终端的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1200 according to an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that the communication apparatus 1200 can implement any function of the terminal device in the embodiment of FIG. 2. The communication device may be a terminal, or a component (for example, a chip or a circuit) configurable in the terminal.
该通信装置1200包括:接收单元1210和发送单元1220,其中,接收单元1210和发送单元1220可以统称为通信单元。The communication device 1200 includes a receiving unit 1210 and a sending unit 1220, where the receiving unit 1210 and the sending unit 1220 may be collectively referred to as a communication unit.
可选的,所述接收单元1210和发送单元1220可以通过收发单元来实现。Optionally, the receiving unit 1210 and the sending unit 1220 may be implemented by a transceiver unit.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1200可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端,例如,可以为终端,或者配置于终端中的芯片或芯片系统。In a possible design, the communication device 1200 may correspond to the terminal in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal, or a chip or chip system configured in the terminal.
具体地,该通信装置1200可对应于图2所示的方法中的终端,该通信装置1200可以包括用于执行图2所示的方法中由终端执行的操作的单元。并且,该通信装置1200中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法的相应流程。Specifically, the communication device 1200 may correspond to the terminal in the method shown in FIG. 2, and the communication device 1200 may include a unit for performing operations performed by the terminal in the method shown in FIG. 2. In addition, the units in the communication device 1200 and the other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding procedures of the method in FIG. 2.
其中,当该通信装置1200用于执行图2中的方法时,接收单元1210可用于执行S210和/或上述实施例中涉及终端侧接收的步骤,发送单元1220可用于执行S220和/或上述实施例中涉及终端侧发送的步骤。Wherein, when the communication device 1200 is used to perform the method in FIG. 2, the receiving unit 1210 can be used to perform S210 and/or the steps involved in terminal-side receiving in the above embodiments, and the sending unit 1220 can be used to perform S220 and/or the above implementations. The example involves the steps sent on the terminal side.
可选地,通信装置1200还可以包括处理单元1230。处理单元1230可用于调度接收单元1210执行S210和调度发送单元1220执行S220,和/或上述实施例中涉及终端侧处理、控制或确定的步骤。Optionally, the communication device 1200 may further include a processing unit 1230. The processing unit 1230 may be used to schedule the receiving unit 1210 to perform S210 and the sending unit 1220 to perform S220, and/or the steps involved in terminal-side processing, control, or determination in the foregoing embodiment.
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置1200为终端时,该通信装置1200中的接收单元1210可对应于图13中示出的终端设备1300中的收发器1320,该通信装置1200中的处理单元1230可对应于图13中示出的终端设备1300中的处理器1310。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1200 is a terminal, the receiving unit 1210 in the communication device 1200 may correspond to the transceiver 1320 in the terminal device 1300 shown in FIG. 13, and the processing unit 1230 in the communication device 1200 may correspond to The processor 1310 in the terminal device 1300 shown in FIG. 13.
还应理解,该通信装置1200为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,该通信装置1200中的接收单元1210可以为输入接口、接口电路、输入电路或管脚,发送单元1220可以为输出接口、接口电路、输出电路或管脚,处理单元1230可以为处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1200 is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device, the receiving unit 1210 in the communication device 1200 may be an input interface, an interface circuit, an input circuit or a pin, and the sending unit 1220 may be an output The interface, interface circuit, output circuit or pin, the processing unit 1230 may be a processor, a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1200可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备,例如,可以为网络设备,或者配置于网络设备中的芯片。In another possible design, the communication device 1200 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device or a chip configured in the network device.
具体地,该通信装置1200可对应于图11所示的方法中的网络设备。此时,该通信装置1200可以包括用于执行图11所示的方法中由网络设备执行的操作的单元。并且,该通信装置1200中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图11所示的方法中的相应流程。Specifically, the communication device 1200 may correspond to the network device in the method shown in FIG. 11. At this time, the communication apparatus 1200 may include a unit for performing operations performed by the network device in the method shown in FIG. 11. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1200 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding procedures in the method shown in FIG. 11.
例如,发送单元1220可用于执行图11所示的方法中的S1110和/或上述实施例中涉及网络侧发送的步骤,接收单元1210可用于执行图11所示的方法中的S1120和/或上述实施例中涉及网络侧接收的步骤。For example, the sending unit 1220 may be used to perform S1110 in the method shown in FIG. 11 and/or the steps involved in network-side sending in the foregoing embodiment, and the receiving unit 1210 may be used to perform S1120 and/or the foregoing steps in the method shown in FIG. 11 The embodiment involves the steps of receiving on the network side.
可选地,通信装置1200还可以包括处理单元1230。处理单元1230可用于调度接收单元1210执行S1120和调度发送单元1220执行S1110,和/或上述实施例中涉及网络侧处理、控制或确定的步骤。Optionally, the communication device 1200 may further include a processing unit 1230. The processing unit 1230 may be used to schedule the receiving unit 1210 to perform S1120 and the sending unit 1220 to perform S1110, and/or the steps involved in network-side processing, control, or determination in the foregoing embodiment.
各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。The specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
应理解,该通信装置1200为网络设备时,该通信装置1200中的接收单元和发送单元为可对应于图14中示出的收发单元1410,该通信装置1200中的处理单元1230可对应于图14中示出的处理器1422。It should be understood that when the communication device 1200 is a network device, the receiving unit and the sending unit in the communication device 1200 may correspond to the transceiver unit 1410 shown in FIG. 14, and the processing unit 1230 in the communication device 1200 may correspond to FIG. The processor 1422 shown in 14.
还应理解,该通信装置1200为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,该通信装置1200中的接收单元1210可以为输入接口、接口电路、输入电路或管脚,发送单元1220可以为输出接口、接口电路、输出电路或管脚,处理单元1230可以为处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1200 is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device, the receiving unit 1210 in the communication device 1200 may be an input interface, an interface circuit, an input circuit or a pin, and the sending unit 1220 may be an output The interface, interface circuit, output circuit or pin, the processing unit 1230 may be a processor, a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
图13是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图。该终端设备可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
如图13所示,该终端设备包括处理器1310和收发器1320。可选地,该终端设备还包括存储器1330。其中,处理器1310、收发器1320和存储器1330之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器1330用于存储计算机程序,该处理器1310用于从该存储器1330中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器1330收发信号。可选地,终端设备还可以包括天线1340,用于将收发器1320输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。As shown in FIG. 13, the terminal device includes a processor 1310 and a transceiver 1320. Optionally, the terminal device further includes a memory 1330. Among them, the processor 1310, the transceiver 1320, and the memory 1330 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and/or data signals. The memory 1330 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 1310 is used to download from the memory 1330. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 1330 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device may further include an antenna 1340 for transmitting uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 1320 through a wireless signal.
上述处理器1310可以和存储器1330可以合成一个处理装置,处理器1310用于执行存储器1330中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器1330也可以集成在处理器1310中,或者独立于处理器1310。The foregoing processor 1310 and the memory 1330 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 1310 is configured to execute program codes stored in the memory 1330 to implement the foregoing functions. During specific implementation, the memory 1330 may also be integrated in the processor 1310 or independent of the processor 1310.
上述收发器1320可以称为收发单元。收发器1320可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中,接收器用于接收信号,发射器用于发射信号。The aforementioned transceiver 1320 may be referred to as a transceiver unit. The transceiver 1320 may include a receiver (or called a receiver, a receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or called a transmitter, a transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
应理解,图13所示的终端设备能够实现图2所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。该终端设备中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。It should be understood that the terminal device shown in FIG. 13 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2. The operation and/or function of each module in the terminal device are respectively for implementing the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the above method embodiments. To avoid repetition, detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
上述处理器1310可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器1320可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 1310 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 1320 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send or receive from the network device action. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述终端设备还可以包括电源1350,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the foregoing terminal device may further include a power supply 1350, which is used to provide power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善,该终端设备还可以包括输入单元1360、显示单元1370、音频电路1380、摄像头1390和传感器1301等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器1382、麦克风1384等。In addition, in order to make the function of the terminal device more complete, the terminal device may also include one or more of the input unit 1360, the display unit 1370, the audio circuit 1380, the camera 1390, and the sensor 1301. The audio circuit also It may include a speaker 1382, a microphone 1384, and so on.
图14是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,例如可以为基站的结构示意图。该基站可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, it may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station. The base station can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
如图14所示,该基站可以包括一个或多个收发单元1410。可选地,该收发单元1410还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等。As shown in FIG. 14, the base station may include one or more transceiver units 1410. Optionally, the transceiver unit 1410 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, and so on.
每个收发单元1410可以包括至少一个天线1411和射频单元1412。可选地,收发单元1410可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。Each transceiver unit 1410 may include at least one antenna 1411 and a radio frequency unit 1412. Optionally, the transceiver unit 1410 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit).
收发单元1410主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送信息和接收终端设备发送的信息。The transceiving unit 1410 is mainly used for the transceiving of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending information to and receiving information sent by terminal equipment.
处理单元1420为基站的控制中心,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如处理单元1420可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。The processing unit 1420 is the control center of the base station, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading. For example, the processing unit 1420 may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
收发单元1410与处理单元1420可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。The transceiver unit 1410 and the processing unit 1420 may be physically arranged together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
在一个示例中,处理单元1420可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。In an example, the processing unit 1420 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access mode, or may respectively support wireless access networks of different access modes. Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
处理单元1420可以包括存储器1421和处理器1422。所述存储器1421用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器1422用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器1421和处理器1422可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。The processing unit 1420 may include a memory 1421 and a processor 1422. The memory 1421 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 1422 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 1421 and the processor 1422 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
应理解,图14所示的基站能够实现图11所示的方法中涉及网络设备的各个过程。该基站中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。It should be understood that the base station shown in FIG. 14 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method shown in FIG. 11. The operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station are to implement the corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the above method embodiments. To avoid repetition, detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
处理单元1420可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而收发单元1410可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的操作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The processing unit 1420 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the transceiving unit 1410 can be used to perform the operations described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device . For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口;所述处理器,用于执行上述方法实施例中的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method in the foregoing method embodiment.
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个芯片。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the foregoing processing device may be a chip. For example, the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, the steps of the above method can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electronic Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图 2或图11所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 11 The method of any one of the embodiments is shown.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2或图11所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 11 The method of any one of the embodiments is shown.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disc,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (solid state disc, SSD)) etc.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment in the above-mentioned device embodiments completely corresponds to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps. For example, the communication unit (transceiver) performs the receiving or In the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving can be executed by the processing unit (processor). For the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. There may be one or more processors.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor. Through the illustration, both the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers. In addition, these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. The component may be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step),能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the various illustrative logical blocks and steps described in the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. achieve. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device, and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
在上述实施例中,各功能单元的功能可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令(程序)。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令(程序)时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the foregoing embodiments, the functions of each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs). When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (62)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it comprises:
    接收配置分组标识;Receive configuration group identification;
    在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送下行数据传输的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈信息,所述下行数据传输与所述配置分组标识对应。The HARQ feedback information of the hybrid automatic repeat request for downlink data transmission is sent in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, and the downlink data transmission corresponds to the configuration group identifier.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识为控制资源集的高层参数索引、上行控制信道资源指示信息或时隙偏移值集合索引。The method according to claim 1, wherein the configuration group identifier is a high-level parameter index of a control resource set, uplink control channel resource indication information, or a time slot offset value set index.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the method further comprises:
    根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机;Determine the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set;
    其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,包括:Wherein, sending HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier includes:
    针对所述下行数据接收时机,根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述待反馈时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。For the downlink data receiving timing, according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier, the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is sent in the time slot to be fed back.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述下行数据接收时机处没有接收到所述下行数据传输时,所述HARQ反馈信息为非确认NACK。The method of claim 3, wherein when the downlink data transmission is not received at the downlink data receiving timing, the HARQ feedback information is a non-acknowledged NACK.
  5. 如权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3 or 4, wherein before the determining the downlink data reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set, the method further comprises:
    从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。The time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back is determined from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合,包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back from a plurality of time slot offset value sets comprises:
    根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,以及所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。According to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier, and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set, determine all from the multiple time slot offset value sets The time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back.
  7. 如权利要求3至6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The method according to any one of claims 3 to 6, wherein the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or according to a signaling sent by a network side device Pre-configured.
  8. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引;Receiving first information, where the first information is used to indicate the index of the first slot offset value between the downlink data transmission and the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the slot offset value set;
    其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,包括:Wherein, sending the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier includes:
    根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;Determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information;
    根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定用于发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息的目标反馈时隙;Determining, according to the first time slot offset value, a target feedback time slot used for sending HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission;
    根据所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述目标反馈时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。Send the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot according to the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier.
  9. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引,根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定的目标反馈时隙为所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙;Receive first information, where the first information is used to indicate the index of the first slot offset value in the slot offset value set between the downlink data transmission and the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission, according to The target feedback time slot determined by the first time slot offset value is the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier;
    其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,包括:Wherein, sending the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier includes:
    根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;Determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information;
    根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定所述目标反馈时隙;Determine the target feedback time slot according to the first time slot offset value;
    在所述目标反馈时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。Sending the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot.
  10. 如权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein before the determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information, the method further comprises :
    从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。The time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier is determined from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from a plurality of time slot offset value sets comprises:
    根据所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。According to the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set, the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier is determined from the multiple time slot offset value sets.
  12. 如权利要求8至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The method according to any one of claims 8 to 11, wherein the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or according to a signaling sent by a network side device Pre-configured.
  13. 如权利要求7或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The method according to claim 7 or 11, wherein the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or pre-configured according to a signaling sent by a network side device of.
  14. 如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,索引的奇偶性不同的时隙所关联的所述配置分组标识不同。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the configuration group identifiers associated with time slots with different parity of indexes are different.
  15. 如权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识为多个配置分组标识中的一个,所述多个配置分组标识中任意配置分组标识所关联的第一时隙与所述任意配置分组标识所关联的第二时隙之间,有且仅有一个所述多个配置分组标识中其他配置分组标识中每个配置分组标识所关联的时隙,其中,所述第一时隙为所述任意配置分组标识所关联的任意时隙,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后第一个与所述任意配置分组标识关联的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the configuration group identifier is one of a plurality of configuration group identifiers, and any configuration group identifier among the plurality of configuration group identifiers is associated with a first Between a time slot and the second time slot associated with the arbitrary configuration group identifier, there is one and only one time slot associated with each configuration group identifier among the other configuration group identifiers in the multiple configuration group identifiers, where The first time slot is any time slot associated with the arbitrarily configured group identifier, and the second time slot is the first time slot associated with the arbitrarily configured group identifier after the first time slot.
  16. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it comprises:
    发送配置分组标识;Send configuration group ID;
    在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈信息,所述下行数据传输与所述配置分组标识对应。The HARQ feedback information of the hybrid automatic repeat request for downlink data transmission is received in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, and the downlink data transmission corresponds to the configuration group identifier.
  17. 如权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识为控制资源集的高层参数索引、上行控制信道资源指示信息或时隙偏移值集合索引。The method according to claim 16, wherein the configuration group identifier is a high-level parameter index of a control resource set, uplink control channel resource indication information, or a time slot offset value set index.
  18. 如权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 16 or 17, wherein the method further comprises:
    根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机;Determine the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set;
    其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,包括:Wherein, receiving HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier includes:
    针对所述下行数据接收时机,根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述待反馈时隙接收所述HARQ反馈信息。For the downlink data receiving opportunity, the HARQ feedback information is received in the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier.
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述下行数据接收时机处没有发送所述下行数据传输时,所述HARQ反馈信息为非确认NACK。The method of claim 18, wherein when the downlink data transmission is not sent at the downlink data receiving timing, the HARQ feedback information is a non-acknowledged NACK.
  20. 如权利要求18或19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 18 or 19, wherein before the determining the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set, the method further comprises:
    从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。The time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back is determined from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  21. 如权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合,包括:The method according to claim 20, wherein the determining the set of time slot offset values associated with the time slot to be fed back from a plurality of time slot offset value sets comprises:
    根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系以及所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。According to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set, determine the time slot offset value set from the The slot offset value set associated with the slot to be fed back.
  22. 如权利要求18至21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The method according to any one of claims 18 to 21, wherein the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or according to a signaling sent by a network side device Pre-configured.
  23. 如权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 16 or 17, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引;Sending first information, where the first information is used to indicate the index of the first slot offset value between the downlink data transmission and the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the slot offset value set;
    其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,包括:Wherein, receiving HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier includes:
    根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;Determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information;
    根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定用于接收所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息的目标反馈时隙;Determining, according to the first time slot offset value, a target feedback time slot for receiving HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission;
    根据所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述目标反馈时隙接收所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。According to the association relationship between the target feedback slot and the configuration group identifier, the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission is received in the target feedback slot.
  24. 如权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 16 or 17, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引,根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定目标反馈时隙为所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙;Send first information, where the first information is used to indicate the index of the first slot offset value in the slot offset value set between the downlink data transmission and the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission, according to The first time slot offset value determines that the target feedback time slot is the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier;
    其中,在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息,包括:Wherein, receiving HARQ feedback information for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier includes:
    根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;Determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information;
    根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定所述目标反馈时隙;Determine the target feedback time slot according to the first time slot offset value;
    在所述目标反馈时隙接收所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。Receiving the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot.
  25. 如权利要求23或24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 23 or 24, wherein before the determining the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information, the method further comprises :
    从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。The time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier is determined from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  26. 如权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合,包括:The method according to claim 25, wherein the determining the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier from a plurality of time slot offset value sets comprises:
    根据所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。According to the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set, the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier is determined from the multiple time slot offset value sets.
  27. 如权利要求23至26中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The method according to any one of claims 23 to 26, wherein the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or according to a signaling sent by a network side device Pre-configured.
  28. 如权利要求22或26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The method according to claim 22 or 26, wherein the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or pre-configured according to a signaling sent by a network side device of.
  29. 如权利要求16至28中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识为多个配置分组标识中的一个,索引的奇偶性不同的时隙关联所述多个配置分组标识中不同的配置分组标识。The method according to any one of claims 16 to 28, wherein the configuration group identifier is one of a plurality of configuration group identifiers, and time slots with different index parities are associated with the multiple configuration group identifiers Different configuration group identification in the.
  30. 如权利要求16至28中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识为多个配置分组标识中的一个,所述多个配置分组标识中任意配置分组标识所关联的第一时隙与所述任意配置分组标识所关联的第二时隙之间,有且仅有一个所述多个配置分组标识中其他配置分组标识所关联的时隙,其中,所述第一时隙为所述任意配置分组标识所关联的任意时隙,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后第一个与所述任意配置分组标识关联的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 16 to 28, wherein the configuration group identifier is one of a plurality of configuration group identifiers, and any configuration group identifier in the plurality of configuration group identifiers is associated with a first Between a time slot and the second time slot associated with the arbitrary configuration group identifier, there is one and only one time slot associated with other configuration group identifiers among the multiple configuration group identifiers, wherein the first time slot The slot is any time slot associated with the arbitrarily configured group identifier, and the second time slot is the first time slot associated with the arbitrarily configured group identifier after the first time slot.
  31. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:接收单元和发送单元;A communication device, characterized by comprising: a receiving unit and a sending unit;
    所述接收单元用于:接收配置分组标识;The receiving unit is configured to: receive a configuration group identifier;
    所述发送单元用于:在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙发送下行数据传输的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈信息,所述下行数据传输与所述配置分组标识对应。The sending unit is configured to send the HARQ feedback information of the hybrid automatic repeat request for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, and the downlink data transmission corresponds to the configuration group identifier.
  32. 如权利要求31所述的装置,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识为控制资源集的高层参数索引、上行控制信道资源指示信息或时隙偏移值集合索引。The apparatus according to claim 31, wherein the configuration group identifier is a high-level parameter index of a control resource set, uplink control channel resource indication information, or a slot offset value set index.
  33. 如权利要求31或32所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括处理单元;The device according to claim 31 or 32, wherein the device further comprises a processing unit;
    所述处理单元用于:根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机;The processing unit is configured to determine the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set;
    其中,所述发送单元具体用于:针对所述下行数据接收时机,根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述待反馈时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。Wherein, the sending unit is specifically configured to send the HARQ of the downlink data transmission in the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier according to the time slot to receive the downlink data. Feedback.
  34. 如权利要求33所述的装置,其特征在于,所述下行数据接收时机处没有接收到所述下行数据传输时,所述HARQ反馈信息为非确认NACK。The apparatus according to claim 33, wherein when the downlink data transmission is not received at the downlink data reception timing, the HARQ feedback information is a non-acknowledged NACK.
  35. 如权利要求33或34所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机之前,所述处理单元还用于:The apparatus according to claim 33 or 34, wherein before the processing unit determines the downlink data reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set, the processing unit is further configured to:
    从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。The time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back is determined from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  36. 如权利要求35所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元具体用于:The device according to claim 35, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,以及所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。According to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier, and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set, determine all from the multiple time slot offset value sets The time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back.
  37. 如权利要求33至36中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先 配置的。The apparatus according to any one of claims 33 to 36, wherein the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or according to a signaling sent by a network side device Pre-configured.
  38. 如权利要求31或32所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元还用于:接收第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引;The device according to claim 31 or 32, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to: receive first information, the first information being used to indicate HARQ feedback of the downlink data transmission and the downlink data transmission The index of the first slot offset value between the information in the slot offset value set;
    其中,所述装置还包括处理单元,用于:根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定用于发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息的目标反馈时隙;Wherein, the device further includes a processing unit, configured to: determine the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information; and according to the first time slot offset value Determining a target feedback time slot used to send HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission;
    所述发送单元具体用于:根据所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述目标反馈时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。The sending unit is specifically configured to send HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot according to the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier.
  39. 如权利要求31或32所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元还用于:接收第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引,根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定的目标反馈时隙为所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙;The device according to claim 31 or 32, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to: receive first information, the first information being used to indicate HARQ feedback of the downlink data transmission and the downlink data transmission The index of the first time slot offset value between information in the time slot offset value set, and the target feedback time slot determined according to the first time slot offset value is the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier;
    其中,所述装置还包括处理单元,用于:根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定所述目标反馈时隙;Wherein, the device further includes a processing unit, configured to: determine the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information; and according to the first time slot offset value Determine the target feedback time slot;
    所述发送单元具体用于:在所述目标反馈时隙发送所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。The sending unit is specifically configured to send HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot.
  40. 如权利要求38或39所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值之前,所述处理单元还用于:The device according to claim 38 or 39, wherein the processing unit determines the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information, the processing Units are also used to:
    从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。The time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier is determined from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  41. 如权利要求40所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元具体用于:The device according to claim 40, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    根据所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。According to the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set, the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier is determined from the multiple time slot offset value sets.
  42. 如权利要求38至41中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The apparatus according to any one of claims 38 to 41, wherein the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or according to a signaling sent by a network side device Pre-configured.
  43. 如权利要求37或41所述的装置,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The apparatus according to claim 37 or 41, wherein the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or pre-configured according to a signaling sent by a network side device of.
  44. 如权利要求31至43中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,索引的奇偶性不同的时隙所关联的所述配置分组标识不同。The apparatus according to any one of claims 31 to 43, wherein the configuration group identifiers associated with time slots with different parity of indexes are different.
  45. 如权利要求31至43中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识为多个配置分组标识中的一个,所述多个配置分组标识中任意配置分组标识所关联的第一时隙与所述任意配置分组标识所关联的第二时隙之间,有且仅有一个所述多个配置分组标识中其他配置分组标识中每个配置分组标识所关联的时隙,其中,所述第一时隙为所述任意配置分组标识所关联的任意时隙,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后第一个与所述任意配置分组标识关联的时隙。The device according to any one of claims 31 to 43, wherein the configuration group identifier is one of a plurality of configuration group identifiers, and any configuration group identifier in the plurality of configuration group identifiers is associated with a first Between a time slot and the second time slot associated with the arbitrary configuration group identifier, there is one and only one time slot associated with each configuration group identifier among other configuration group identifiers in the multiple configuration group identifiers, where The first time slot is any time slot associated with the arbitrarily configured group identifier, and the second time slot is the first time slot associated with the arbitrarily configured group identifier after the first time slot.
  46. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:发送单元和接收单元:A communication device, characterized by comprising: a sending unit and a receiving unit:
    所述发送单元用于:发送配置分组标识;The sending unit is used to send a configuration group identifier;
    所述接收单元用于:在所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙接收下行数据传输的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈信息,所述下行数据传输与所述配置分组标识对应。The receiving unit is configured to receive the HARQ feedback information of the hybrid automatic repeat request for downlink data transmission in the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier, and the downlink data transmission corresponds to the configuration group identifier.
  47. 如权利要求46所述的装置,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识为控制资源集的高层参数索引、上行控制信道资源指示信息或时隙偏移值集合索引。The apparatus according to claim 46, wherein the configuration group identifier is a high-level parameter index of a control resource set, uplink control channel resource indication information, or a time slot offset value set index.
  48. 如权利要求46或47所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括处理单元:The device according to claim 46 or 47, wherein the device further comprises a processing unit:
    所述处理单元用于:根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机;The processing unit is configured to determine the downlink data receiving timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set;
    其中,所述接收单元具体用于:针对所述下行数据接收时机,根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述待反馈时隙接收所述HARQ反馈信息。Wherein, the receiving unit is specifically configured to receive the HARQ feedback information in the time slot to be fed back according to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier according to the time slot for receiving the downlink data.
  49. 如权利要求48所述的装置,其特征在于,所述下行数据接收时机处没有发送所述下行数据传输时,所述HARQ反馈信息为非确认NACK。The apparatus according to claim 48, wherein when the downlink data transmission is not sent at the downlink data receiving timing, the HARQ feedback information is a non-acknowledged NACK.
  50. 如权利要求48或49所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元根据时隙偏移值集合确定待反馈时隙对应的下行数据接收时机之前,所述处理单元还用于:The apparatus according to claim 48 or 49, wherein before the processing unit determines the downlink data reception timing corresponding to the time slot to be fed back according to the time slot offset value set, the processing unit is further configured to:
    从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。The time slot offset value set associated with the time slot to be fed back is determined from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  51. 如权利要求50所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元具体用于:The device according to claim 50, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    根据所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系以及所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述待反馈时隙关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。According to the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier and the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set, determine the time slot offset value set from the The slot offset value set associated with the slot to be fed back.
  52. 如权利要求48至51中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述待反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The method according to any one of claims 48 to 51, wherein the association relationship between the time slot to be fed back and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or according to a signaling sent by a network side device Pre-configured.
  53. 如权利要求46或47所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送单元还用于:发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引;The apparatus according to claim 46 or 47, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send first information, and the first information is used to indicate HARQ feedback of the downlink data transmission and the downlink data transmission The index of the first slot offset value between the information in the slot offset value set;
    其中,所述装置还包括处理单元,用于:根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定用于接收所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息的目标反馈时隙;Wherein, the device further includes a processing unit, configured to: determine the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information; and according to the first time slot offset value Determining a target feedback time slot for receiving HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission;
    所述接收单元具体用于:根据所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系,在所述目标反馈时隙接收所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。The receiving unit is specifically configured to receive the HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot according to the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier.
  54. 如权利要求46或47所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送单元还用于:发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述下行数据传输与所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息之间的第一时隙偏移值在时隙偏移值集合中的索引,根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定的目标反馈时隙为所述配置分组标识所关联的时隙;The apparatus according to claim 46 or 47, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send first information, and the first information is used to indicate HARQ feedback of the downlink data transmission and the downlink data transmission The index of the first time slot offset value between information in the time slot offset value set, and the target feedback time slot determined according to the first time slot offset value is the time slot associated with the configuration group identifier;
    其中,所述装置还包括处理单元,用于:根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值;根据所述第一时隙偏移值确定所述目标反馈时隙;Wherein, the device further includes a processing unit, configured to: determine the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information; and according to the first time slot offset value Determine the target feedback time slot;
    所述接收单元具体用于:在所述目标反馈时隙接收所述下行数据传输的HARQ反馈信息。The receiving unit is specifically configured to: receive HARQ feedback information of the downlink data transmission in the target feedback time slot.
  55. 如权利要求53或54所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元根据所述第一信息从所述时隙偏移值集合中确定所述第一时隙偏移值之前,所述处理单元还用于:The apparatus according to claim 53 or 54, characterized in that, before the processing unit determines the first time slot offset value from the time slot offset value set according to the first information, the processing Units are also used to:
    从多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。The time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier is determined from a plurality of time slot offset value sets.
  56. 如权利要求55所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元具体用于:The device according to claim 55, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    根据所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系,从所述多个时隙偏移值集合中确定所述配置分组标识关联的所述时隙偏移值集合。According to the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set, the time slot offset value set associated with the configuration group identifier is determined from the multiple time slot offset value sets.
  57. 如权利要求53至56中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述目标反馈时隙与所述配置分组标识的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The apparatus according to any one of claims 53 to 56, wherein the association relationship between the target feedback time slot and the configuration group identifier is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or according to signaling sent by a network side device Pre-configured.
  58. 如权利要求52或56所述的装置,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识与所述时隙偏移值集合的关联关系是根据通信协议预先配置的或根据网络侧设备发送的信令预先配置的。The apparatus according to claim 52 or 56, wherein the association relationship between the configuration group identifier and the time slot offset value set is pre-configured according to a communication protocol or pre-configured according to a signaling sent by a network side device of.
  59. 如权利要求46至58中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识为多个配置分组标识中的一个,索引的奇偶性不同的时隙关联所述多个配置分组标识中不同的配置分组标识。The apparatus according to any one of claims 46 to 58, wherein the configuration group identifier is one of a plurality of configuration group identifiers, and time slots with different parity of indexes are associated with the plurality of configuration group identifiers Different configuration group identification in the.
  60. 如权利要求46至58中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述配置分组标识为多个配置分组标识中的一个,所述多个配置分组标识中任意配置分组标识所关联的第一时隙与所述任意配置分组标识所关联的第二时隙之间,有且仅有一个所述多个配置分组标识中其他配置分组标识所关联的时隙,其中,所述第一时隙为所述任意配置分组标识所关联的任意时隙,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后第一个与所述任意配置分组标识关联的时隙。The device according to any one of claims 46 to 58, wherein the configuration group identifier is one of a plurality of configuration group identifiers, and any configuration group identifier among the plurality of configuration group identifiers is associated with a first Between a time slot and the second time slot associated with the arbitrary configuration group identifier, there is one and only one time slot associated with other configuration group identifiers among the multiple configuration group identifiers, wherein the first time slot The slot is any time slot associated with the arbitrarily configured group identifier, and the second time slot is the first time slot associated with the arbitrarily configured group identifier after the first time slot.
  61. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储计算机程序,其特征在于,该程序被处理器执行时,实现执行如权利要求1至30中任一项所述的通信方法。A computer-readable storage medium with a computer program stored thereon, characterized in that, when the program is executed by a processor, the communication method according to any one of claims 1 to 30 is implemented.
  62. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和通信接口,所述处理器用于执行计算机程序,使得所述通信装置实现如权利要求1至30中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor and a communication interface, the processor is used to execute a computer program, so that the communication device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 30.
PCT/CN2020/100452 2019-07-29 2020-07-06 Communication method and communication device WO2021017765A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910687912.3 2019-07-29
CN201910687912.3A CN112311501B (en) 2019-07-29 2019-07-29 Communication method and communication device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021017765A1 true WO2021017765A1 (en) 2021-02-04

Family

ID=74229438

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/100452 WO2021017765A1 (en) 2019-07-29 2020-07-06 Communication method and communication device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN112311501B (en)
WO (1) WO2021017765A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115134759A (en) * 2021-03-26 2022-09-30 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Construction method, device and equipment of semi-static HARQ codebook and readable storage medium
CN113452485B (en) * 2021-06-28 2022-07-19 中信科移动通信技术股份有限公司 Method and system for realizing downlink HARQ feedback mechanism
CN117413591A (en) * 2021-09-30 2024-01-16 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless communication method, terminal equipment and network equipment

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107623931A (en) * 2016-07-14 2018-01-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Group management method, the apparatus and system of multipoint cooperative
WO2018144470A1 (en) * 2017-02-02 2018-08-09 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. SHORT PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL (PUCCH) DESIGN FOR 5th GENERATION (5G) NEW RADIO (NR)
CN109478978A (en) * 2016-07-18 2019-03-15 三星电子株式会社 Carrier wave polymerization with the variable propagation duration

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009129612A1 (en) * 2008-04-21 2009-10-29 Nortel Networks Limited Methods and systems for harq protocols
WO2010123304A2 (en) * 2009-04-24 2010-10-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multiplexing large payloads of control information from user equipments
KR101757296B1 (en) * 2009-08-18 2017-07-13 엘지전자 주식회사 The apparatus and method for performing HARQ procedure
CN108809524B (en) * 2017-04-28 2021-04-09 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for transmitting feedback information
KR102330649B1 (en) * 2017-11-22 2021-11-23 에프쥐 이노베이션 컴퍼니 리미티드 Discontinuous receive operations between multiple bandwidth portions

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107623931A (en) * 2016-07-14 2018-01-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Group management method, the apparatus and system of multipoint cooperative
CN109478978A (en) * 2016-07-18 2019-03-15 三星电子株式会社 Carrier wave polymerization with the variable propagation duration
WO2018144470A1 (en) * 2017-02-02 2018-08-09 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. SHORT PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL (PUCCH) DESIGN FOR 5th GENERATION (5G) NEW RADIO (NR)

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
OPPO: "Enhancements on multi-TRP and multi-panel transmission", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1906287, vol. RAN WG1, 3 May 2019 (2019-05-03), Reno, USA, pages 1 - 11, XP051708324 *
QUALCOMM INCORPORATED: "Multi-TRP Enhancements", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1907289 MULTI-TRP ENHANCEMENTS, vol. RAN WG1, 4 May 2019 (2019-05-04), Reno, Nevada, USA, pages 1 - 25, XP051709312 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112311501B (en) 2022-04-05
CN112311501A (en) 2021-02-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12003340B2 (en) Method for sending hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgment information, method for receiving hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgment information, and communications apparatus
US11425697B2 (en) Dynamic management of uplink control signaling resources in wireless network
WO2020143752A1 (en) Information transmission method and communication device
JP7032576B2 (en) Feedback information transmission method and communication device
US11968675B2 (en) Uplink control information sending and receiving method and communications apparatus
WO2019130521A1 (en) User terminal and radio communication method
WO2021204208A1 (en) Determination method for channel state information csi report, and communication device
WO2019130522A1 (en) Radio base station and radio communication method
CN111200871B (en) Method and communication device for receiving data
WO2021017765A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2020221021A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2020199856A1 (en) Information transmission method and communication apparatus
JP2020523841A (en) Feedback information transmission/reception method, apparatus and communication system
TWI797105B (en) Method and device for uplink transmission, terminal equipment, access network equipment, and system
WO2021032015A1 (en) Feedback information transmission method and communication apparatus
CN111865515B (en) Communication method and communication device
JP2022550556A (en) Feedback information transmission method and apparatus
WO2021003620A1 (en) Downlink signal transmission method and device
WO2021031754A1 (en) Feedback information transmission method and device
WO2020143813A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting information
US20230188301A1 (en) Information Transmission Method and Communication Apparatus
US20220174523A1 (en) Method for determining hybrid automatic repeat request-acknowledgment harq-ack resource
US20220174524A1 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
WO2020156002A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
CN114390698A (en) Data transmission method, device, medium and program product

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20846320

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20846320

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1